1. IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | Hi! I'm Chad Perkins and welcome to
Encore CS5 Essential Training.
| | 00:08 | Encore CS5 is a powerful application
that allows you to author DVDs, Blu-Ray
| | 00:13 | discs and even Flash Web sites.
| | 00:16 | In this training title, we're going to
start out with a simple DVD authoring project.
| | 00:20 | In just a few minutes, you'll have all the
tools you need to make a basic DVD on your own.
| | 00:25 | We'll look at how to add multiple
audio and subtitle tracks to your DVDs,
| | 00:30 | create image slide shows to show off images
and how to use Encore as a presentation tool.
| | 00:35 | We'll also be talking about some
really great tips and tricks to use when
| | 00:39 | authoring discs, such as how to
create games, and create hidden content
| | 00:43 | called Easter Eggs.
| | 00:44 | Then we'll wrap it all up with a
discussion of exporting to DVD, Blu-ray and
| | 00:49 | even Flash Web sites.
| | 00:50 | You don't need any previous
experience to go through this training, just be
| | 00:54 | prepared to learn and have a blast.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| What is Encore?| 00:00 | Adobe Encore CS5 is a powerful but
surprisingly-easy to use authoring tool
| | 00:05 | used to create DVDs, high-definition Blu-
ray discs and even Flash based Web sites.
| | 00:10 | Encore ships with Premiere Pro as part of
a well-integrated suite of video products.
| | 00:15 | New users will be able to understand the
simple and intuitive workflow, and will
| | 00:19 | be able to assemble and burn a DVD
within minutes of working with Encore CS5.
| | 00:23 | More season DVD authors will be
impressed with the more powerful features,
| | 00:27 | such as Playlists, End Action Overrides, and
powerful features for audio and subtitle tracks.
| | 00:32 | Encore CS5 allows you to create high-
definition Blue-ray discs, the industry
| | 00:36 | standard now and for years to come.
| | 00:39 | You can take advantage of the unique
capabilities of Blu-ray discs in Encore
| | 00:43 | building semi-transparent pop-up menus,
so viewers can preview menu options
| | 00:47 | while continuing to watch your video.
| | 00:49 | These menus cannot only become menus
for DVD and Blue-ray disc, but they also
| | 00:53 | become Web pages when we
output Flash Web site from Encore.
| | 00:57 | Business users will also find help
from Encore as a tool for creating
| | 01:00 | presentations, building beautiful
slideshows and slide captions, and the ability
| | 01:04 | to add data contented
discs as well as video content.
| | 01:07 | Finally, Encore is primarily an
authoring tool, and Encore CS5 does
| | 01:11 | this remarkably well.
| | 01:13 | Whether you're going to burn a single
disc on your home computer, or take a
| | 01:16 | copy-protected, region-encoded master
to a professional replication facility,
| | 01:21 | Encore has the tools for the job.
| | 01:23 | With its impressive ease of use,
colossal library of free content, and its
| | 01:27 | incomparable set of features, you'll
be very happy to see what Encore CS5 can
| | 01:31 | do for you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you are a premium member of the
lynda.com Online Training Library, or if you
| | 00:04 | purchased this training on a disc, then
you'll have access to the Exercise Files
| | 00:08 | that accompany this training.
| | 00:10 | So let me show you how I have laid those out.
| | 00:12 | Now, there is a folder for every
chapter of this training, and I've put the
| | 00:18 | project files, the Encore.ncor
project files, in the accompanying folder of
| | 00:24 | that chapter.
| | 00:25 | So while we're working in Chapter_04
in the training, then you'll find the
| | 00:28 | projects we work on there in the
Chapter_04 folder of the Exercise Files.
| | 00:33 | Also in the Exercise Files, you'll
find the Media folder, and it's here that
| | 00:37 | you'll find the content
linked to in the project.
| | 00:41 | Now this will make more sense as we go
throughout this training and explaining a
| | 00:44 | little bit about Encore projects.
| | 00:46 | But if you need an individual component,
such as a PSD file, or an audio file,
| | 00:51 | still image, video, or even one of the
miscellaneous project files that we're
| | 00:55 | going to be getting into here,
you'll find those in the Media folder inside
| | 00:59 | of the Exercise Files folder.
| | 01:01 | Now, if you're a monthly or an
annual subscriber to the lynda.com Online
| | 01:05 | Training Library, then you won't have
access to these files, but you could
| | 01:08 | still just watch the training, or you could
make up your own stuff and still follow along.
| | 01:12 | So with that of the way, let's get to it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Reconnecting unlinked media| 00:00 | Sometimes when you open up an Encore
project, and sometimes maybe when you work
| | 00:04 | with the Exercise Files that
accompanying this training, you might get this
| | 00:07 | dialog box, and basically what this
means is that Encore cannot find a certain
| | 00:12 | asset that you've imported into this project.
| | 00:14 | So basically what you need to do is
navigate to where the asset is, in this case
| | 00:18 | it's in the Media folder/Video folder,
and then yummy doughnuts right here.
| | 00:23 | Now, if you accidentally click Offline,
maybe you sneeze on it or something,
| | 00:27 | let's go ahead and click Offline, and
you have the Asset here in your project,
| | 00:32 | you click to select it,
| | 00:33 | you'll see this little icon, which
means its offline, which means that
| | 00:36 | Encore can't find it.
| | 00:37 | So what we can do is right-click on it,
choose Locate Asset, then navigate to the
| | 00:42 | Asset, and go ahead and
click Open, and then that's it.
| | 00:47 | That's all you have to do.
| | 00:48 | The Asset is now here in the Project panel,
we can test that by clicking the play
| | 00:51 | icon up here at the top of the
Project panel, and you can see our Asset is
| | 00:55 | intact and Encore has found it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Project: Building a Simple DVDProject overview| 00:00 | All right folks. In this chapter, we're going
to jump into Encore and get our hands dirty.
| | 00:05 | We're going to actually make a project
from scratch, complete with a menu a
| | 00:09 | Navigation, a Timeline, and all sorts of
great stuff, and we're going to learn a
| | 00:14 | lot about Encore and the
Encore workflow in the process.
| | 00:18 | Now if at the end of this chapter you
still feel a little uneasy, that's okay.
| | 00:22 | We're going to be going through each
step in this chapter over and over again
| | 00:26 | in much more detail as we go
through this training series.
| | 00:29 | But that being said, let me show you
what the final project is going to look
| | 00:32 | like once we're done.
| | 00:33 | I'm going to go ahead and click this
Preview button in Encore and here is the
| | 00:37 | DVD, as if you were watching it on a
set top player, and this is what you will
| | 00:41 | be creating throughout this chapter.
| | 00:43 | Let's check it out.
| | 00:45 | (Music playing.)
| | 00:46 | (Male speaker: Beautiful scenery, plenty of places to ride,
beautiful weather - it just doesn't get any better than this.)
| | 01:01 | So there you have it, and
back to the menu it goes.
| | 01:03 | This complete project, again,
we're going to be starting from scratch,
| | 01:07 | creating it here in Encore.
| | 01:09 | So let's jump in and get going.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing content| 00:00 | The first step in this project is
that we're going to import footage into
| | 00:04 | our Encore Project.
| | 00:05 | We can do this in several ways.
| | 00:07 | We can go to the File menu
and go to Import As > Asset.
| | 00:11 | We can also use the keyboard shortcut
Command+I on the Mac or Ctrl+I on the PC.
| | 00:17 | We can also right-click in the
Project panel and do the same thing.
| | 00:20 | But one of the things I like to do
when I Import, because I find it to be the
| | 00:23 | easiest, just to go to the Project
panel, and find some blank area here, and
| | 00:28 | just double-click in the Project panel.
| | 00:30 | I'm going to Navigate to the Video
Folder. That's inside the Media Folder, that's
| | 00:35 | inside the Exercise Files
that came with this training.
| | 00:37 | I'm going to select the Explore
California ad.mp4 file and click open.
| | 00:42 | This file has now been imported into our
project and shows up in the Project panel.
| | 00:47 | We can use this as a video to link to
from a menu button, or we can use it in
| | 00:52 | several other ways as well, as
we'll discuss later on in the training.
| | 00:56 | As we will get later, the Project
panel is kind of like this storage bank,
| | 00:59 | and everything that we import comes here in
to the Project panel to be used later on.
| | 01:05 | It's important to know that this file,
| | 01:07 | this Explore California movie,
is not embedded in this Project.
| | 01:12 | We've basically imported
just a Link to the Project.
| | 01:15 | We cannot adjust this Video
on our hard drives from Encore at all.
| | 01:19 | We're only bringing in a Link to that file.
| | 01:23 | So it's important before you import
something, that you make sure that it's
| | 01:26 | in the right spot with the right name,
because if you change it's name or
| | 01:30 | move it or delete it, then Encore
won't be able to find it, and your Project
| | 01:34 | will no longer work.
| | 01:35 | Now in the same way that we imported
this Video File, we could also import all
| | 01:40 | kinds of files, Still Images,
Flash Video, Audio Files and more.
| | 01:46 | So there's tons that we can do here to
bring into our Project to create assets
| | 01:51 | that we can use throughout our Encore Project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using included content| 00:00 | One of my favorite parts about Encore is it
comes with this huge library of free stuff.
| | 00:05 | And who doesn't love free stuff?
| | 00:07 | So I want to have this movie here right
at the outside of the Training Series to
| | 00:09 | tell you about this amazing bundle
of goodies that comes with Encore.
| | 00:14 | Now I'm going to be using the Library
panel, and a panel is just a little area
| | 00:18 | like this, like, for example, we were
looking at the Project panel in the last
| | 00:21 | Movie, here's the Properties panel, so it's
just these little modules inside of Encore.
| | 00:26 | We'll talk more about the interface a
little bit later, but for now, know that
| | 00:29 | most of the action is going to be
taking place here in the Library panel as
| | 00:33 | far as free stuff goes.
| | 00:34 | If you're not seeing the Library
panel, you can go over the Window menu,
| | 00:37 | and select Library.
| | 00:39 | Now, in the Library panel,
we'll see the Set dropdown.
| | 00:42 | If you click this here, you'll see there
are actually many categories of free stuff.
| | 00:47 | It equates to several gigabytes of goodies.
| | 00:50 | Now if you've purchased Encore online,
this stuff will be a separate download.
| | 00:54 | So make sure you get that, and if you
purchased Encore on a disc, then this will
| | 00:59 | also be a separate
installation on a different disc.
| | 01:01 | So if you're only seeing General, then
you missed out on all of the goodies, so
| | 01:06 | make sure you go back and install those.
| | 01:09 | But basically here, we'll be using throughout
the Training Series, but there are tons of menus.
| | 01:14 | We can click on, let's say, for
example, Party menu HD, and we can click on
| | 01:19 | Airplane, our little Airplane here.
| | 01:21 | So there's different like Type Styles
and Images and just little flourishes
| | 01:26 | and buttons, all kinds of things
that we can add to our projects, even
| | 01:29 | background Images, and Shapes, and
just little things that we can use to
| | 01:34 | enhance our Project.
| | 01:35 | So even if you only have a video to
start out with, then you can use Encore's
| | 01:40 | set of stuff to make your File DVD.
You could use Encore's Buttons, Encore's
| | 01:45 | included Backgrounds and menus.
| | 01:47 | Now, of course, you can make your own,
and I'll show how to do that, but it's
| | 01:50 | really cool to know that all of the
stuff that you absolutely need is already
| | 01:54 | here for you in the program, and
there's tons and tons of content, and there's
| | 01:57 | tons of ways that you can
customize it to your own choosing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a menu to a project| 00:00 | So now we are going to continue here and we're actually
going to go over to our Library panel, and we're
| | 00:03 | going to add a menu from the Library
panel to our project and actually tweak
| | 00:07 | that menu a little bit.
| | 00:09 | So go to Library panel, and we
have these buttons here, and these are
| | 00:12 | essentially filters for different objects.
| | 00:14 | As you can see, as I mouse over these,
it says Toggle display of images,
| | 00:18 | backgrounds, buttons, menus, and so by
default, they are all pressed, so we are
| | 00:22 | seeing all of these objects.
| | 00:24 | Right now, I only want to see menus,
so I'm going to just click this first
| | 00:27 | button, and that will show me only menus.
| | 00:30 | Keep in mind this is only in the
General category, so if I want to see Wedding
| | 00:34 | menus, if I'm making a Wedding DV, I
can click on Wedding or Travel, if I want
| | 00:38 | to see Travel menus, and so on.
| | 00:40 | I'm going to leave this set to
General for the time being, and I'm going to
| | 00:42 | scroll down, and click once on the
Sunset menu. As I click once on this menu,
| | 00:48 | I can Preview this, and we are
making a menu for this Explore California
| | 00:52 | Company, so this menu is
going to look pretty good.
| | 00:55 | So we are going to go ahead and just
double-click this menu in the Library
| | 00:58 | panel, and in just a few moments it
will be added to the Project panel as an
| | 01:03 | asset that I can use as I please.
| | 01:06 | Now it says Inspirational Thoughts here.
| | 01:08 | That's not really what we're going for,
and we only have one menu item here,
| | 01:12 | just one movie to play.
| | 01:14 | So what I'm going to do is I'm going to
click on the languages button, and hit
| | 01:17 | the Delete key on my keyboard.
| | 01:18 | Same thing with special features,
click Special Features, hit Delete, click
| | 01:22 | Scene Selections and press Delete.
| | 01:25 | If you are not able to do that,
you'll need to make sure that you have this
| | 01:27 | Black Arrow tool selected.
| | 01:29 | It's called the Selection tool.
| | 01:31 | You'll find in the upper left-hand
corner of the interface in this tools area,
| | 01:34 | and that will allow you to
select the tools and then delete them.
| | 01:38 | The next problem with this movie is
the title of the menu here, so what I'm
| | 01:43 | going to do is I'm going to
select the Type tool here.
| | 01:46 | It looks like a letter T here, and I'm
going to go back over to this Text, and I
| | 01:50 | don't want this bracket.
| | 01:52 | See how I have this little
bracket around my cursor?
| | 01:54 | I don't want that. As I bring this closer
to the Inspirational Thoughts text,
| | 01:59 | those brackets go away.
| | 02:00 | So this is bad, good, bad, good.
| | 02:03 | So I'm going to click in here, once I
have those brackets gone, and now those
| | 02:06 | brackets tell me that I'm going to create
New text, which is not what I want to do.
| | 02:09 | When those brackets go away, it
tells me I'm going to edit existing text,
| | 02:13 | which is what I want.
| | 02:13 | So I'm going to click in here with
those brackets, and then I can hit the
| | 02:18 | Delete key to delete these, and I'm
going to type the real name of our menu,
| | 02:23 | which is Explore California.
| | 02:27 | To accept the text, go ahead and go
back and select the Selection tool again in
| | 02:31 | the Tools panel, and now we've
created a menu, using the Library, and we've
| | 02:36 | also tweaked it very quickly, without
very much effort at all, and made it suit
| | 02:41 | our purposes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| What are timelines?| 00:00 | So now that our little mini project
has a menu, and a button and a video to
| | 00:04 | link to, it should seem like all we have to
do is just link up the button to the movie.
| | 00:09 | But there is another step
we need to go through first.
| | 00:12 | And that is we need to take this
video and put it inside of a Timeline.
| | 00:15 | A Timeline is an Encore object, and
that is what you need to put your videos
| | 00:21 | into, if you want to be able to link to them.
| | 00:24 | So what I'm going to do is I'm going
to go down to the bottom of the Project
| | 00:27 | panel, click this little dropdown
here, and this creates a New something.
| | 00:32 | Anytime you see this little piece of paper icon
| | 00:33 | that looks like you are turning a page,
| | 00:35 | this is Adobe's icon for making a New something.
| | 00:38 | So what I'm going to do is I'm
going to make a new Timeline.
| | 00:41 | So all I have to do is make a timeline,
and then take this Footage and drag and
| | 00:46 | drop it into our Timeline here.
| | 00:49 | Now it doesn't have a Name, our
Timeline doesn't, do what we could do is
| | 00:54 | right-click on it and choose Rename.
| | 00:57 | I'll call this Explore CA ad, and click
OK, and then now we have this Timeline.
| | 01:05 | And this object is the thing that we will
link to when we link this up in the next movie.
| | 01:10 | So again, we have our menu.
| | 01:12 | We're going to link from the button to
the Timeline, not the original movie.
| | 01:16 | The Timeline thing is can be cool,
because we put multiple movies, and even do
| | 01:19 | some minor video Edits, here, in the Timeline.
| | 01:22 | Now an even faster way to create a Timeline,
if you're interested, is - I'm going to
| | 01:26 | actually select this Timeline and
Delete it, start from scratch here, select
| | 01:30 | Yes - then I'm going to select the
piece of Footage, the Asset that I want to
| | 01:34 | turn into a Timeline,
| | 01:35 | or put into a Timeline, and press the
keyboard shortcut Command+T on the Mac,
| | 01:40 | T for Timeline, or Ctrl+T on the PC.
| | 01:43 | This automatically takes your Footage,
puts it into a Timeline, and it already
| | 01:48 | named it for us based on our Footage.
| | 01:51 | So this Command+T, Ctrl+T
shortcut is truly a shortcut indeed.
| | 01:57 | Now we have these two Encore objects,
a menu and a Timeline and we're ready to
| | 02:00 | link them up together.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating links and navigation| 00:00 | So now that we have our menu and our Timeline
we're ready connect this button to this Timeline.
| | 00:05 | So when users press this button or
activate this button, it plays this Timeline.
| | 00:09 | Now there are two ways to link these
objects, or in other words create navigation.
| | 00:15 | One is the Properties panel.
| | 00:17 | That's what we're going to
talk about in this movie.
| | 00:18 | Later on, we'll talk about another method
called the Flowchart, this little tab right here.
| | 00:23 | I actually prefer to use the Flowchart, but
it's little bit more confusing for new users.
| | 00:27 | We're going to see this for
later on in the Training Series.
| | 00:29 | I'm going to go back to NTSC_Sunset menu.
| | 00:32 | You'll notice, in the Properties panel,
if I expand my interface here, so I
| | 00:36 | could see all of these properties,
| | 00:38 | the Properties panel is this panel that
is dynamic, based on what is selected.
| | 00:44 | So if I click play movie, it's a button.
| | 00:47 | So I'll be getting Properties for the button.
| | 00:50 | So these options will change.
| | 00:52 | If I select Timeline, I
will get Timeline properties.
| | 00:55 | So I could adjust those.
| | 00:57 | If I click an Asset, I'll get Asset Properties.
| | 00:59 | Menu, I'll get menu Properties and so on.
| | 01:02 | So what I want to do then is click
on this button in the Menu Viewer.
| | 01:07 | If you're not seeing that, let's
just double-click the menu, click on the
| | 01:10 | button to select it.
| | 01:12 | Then right here where it says Link,
what we're going to do is grab this
| | 01:15 | little icon right here.
| | 01:16 | This is called the Pick Whip.
| | 01:18 | So click and drag the pick whip over to what
we want to link it to, which is the Timeline.
| | 01:23 | So I am just going to click here.
| | 01:26 | Now this is linked to the Timeline.
| | 01:29 | Now if you inadvertently select
something, like just a blank space or something
| | 01:33 | like that, you get this
little Spaghetti Whip icon.
| | 01:36 | If you get that, that's indicating that
it doesn't understand what you're doing,
| | 01:40 | and that won't work.
| | 01:41 | So you want to make sure that you don't
Link to something that you can't Link to.
| | 01:45 | So again, we want the
button to go to the Timeline.
| | 01:49 | For me, this is actually one of the
most fun parts of Encore, because this
| | 01:53 | little pick whip thing is very
intuitive, but it's also very fun.
| | 01:56 | So it's really great to use this
Properties panel to link things up in this way.
| | 02:00 | That's really all it takes
to make an Encore project.
| | 02:04 | Now one little tip that's quite important
actually, that you might not be aware of.
| | 02:08 | So let's say users watch your DVD, and
they have this menu and there's this button
| | 02:12 | they click, and they watch a little movie here.
| | 02:14 | Well, what happens when that movie is done?
| | 02:16 | Do they go on to a different movie, or do
they go on back to the menu? What happens then?
| | 02:22 | You might assume that it would go back
to the menu, but Encore doesn't assume that.
| | 02:25 | Encore has no idea what you want it to do.
| | 02:27 | So what we need to do is actually
click our Timeline, so that we could see
| | 02:31 | the Timeline in the Properties panel here,
and change something called the End Action,
| | 02:37 | what you want Encore to tell the DVD
Player to do once the Timeline comes to an end.
| | 02:43 | Actually, what we want it to
do is to go back to the menu.
| | 02:45 | So under End Action with the Timeline
selected in the Properties panel, click on
| | 02:49 | the pick whip, this little At sign here,
| | 02:51 | this little backwards At sign, actually.
| | 02:53 | Click this, and drag this to the menu.
| | 02:57 | So now we have a complete project.
| | 02:59 | We have a menu with a button.
| | 03:01 | When we click the button, we play the timeline.
| | 03:03 | At the end of the timeline,
we go back to the menu.
| | 03:06 | We've created a perfect loop.
| | 03:08 | Everything will work according to plan.
| | 03:10 | We're ready to burn our DVD.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting| 00:00 | So folks, congratulations.
| | 00:01 | If you've been following along,
you've just made your first DVD project.
| | 00:05 | It's really just that easy.
| | 00:07 | All the stuff that we have been going
on through in this Training Series is
| | 00:10 | basically refining what we've already done.
| | 00:12 | I mean this really is the core
workflow of Encore, and we've done it.
| | 00:16 | Now before actually burn this to DVD, or
Blu-ray, or make that a Flash-based Web
| | 00:20 | site out of this, there's cool things
that we want to do as we'll talk about
| | 00:23 | later in this Training Series.
| | 00:24 | First of all, we want to make sure that
we didn't inadvertently mess something
| | 00:28 | up, that we didn't miss something somewhere.
| | 00:29 | Let's just say, for example, in the
Timeline, I want to make sure we didn't
| | 00:32 | forget to add an End Action, and we
can actually have Encore go through the
| | 00:36 | project automatically and see
if there will be predicted errors.
| | 00:40 | The other thing we want to do is want
to preview our project and see what it
| | 00:43 | would look like for the User
| | 00:45 | once it's burnt to DVD. We can actually
do that by clicking this little button
| | 00:48 | right here. So I'm going to click the
Preview button, the Disc in the toolbar,
| | 00:52 | and we will get the Preview window and
here is our DVD, and I can juts use my
| | 00:57 | mouse as if it were DVD
remote to click Play Movie.
| | 01:02 | (Male speaker: Beautiful scenery, plenty of places to ride,
beautiful weather - it just doesn't get any better than this.)
| | 01:16 | Aha, so I played just as expected and
again, as expected, as we told it to do, at
| | 01:22 | the end of the Timeline, it came right back to
the menu, and we are done. So, looking good.
| | 01:28 | I'm going to click either Exit here, or
Exit and Return. For our purposes here,
| | 01:31 | doesn't matter, and we go over the
Build panel, which, by default, is over from
| | 01:36 | the Project panel here and again, if
it's not showing, you can go the Window
| | 01:39 | menu and choose Build.
| | 01:41 | I'm just going to go ahead and click the Build
tab here, stretch this out so we could see it
| | 01:44 | a little bit better.
| | 01:46 | If this is confusing you, how you
move these panels around,
| | 01:48 | we'll talk about that when we
look at the interface a little later on.
| | 01:51 | But basically, we need to choose the
format here, whether we want to burn to
| | 01:55 | DVD, Blu-ray Disc, or
create a Flash-based Web site.
| | 02:00 | And we could do all of these things, we
could spit it out to DVD or Blu-ray or
| | 02:03 | Flash from the same project, so
we've to go start from scratch and make
| | 02:06 | everything all over again,
| | 02:07 | if we decide that we want to make our
DVD a disc and then make it a Web site.
| | 02:12 | We just have to simply change our options here.
| | 02:15 | Now there are a host of options and
parameters to fiddle with and adjust.
| | 02:19 | We'll be going over these
throughout the Training Series.
| | 02:22 | But you basically know what you need to
know, so if you wanted to, you could go
| | 02:26 | ahead and click Build.
| | 02:27 | It will actually burn your DVD to a disc.
| | 02:31 | Now, of course, Encore gets much more
powerful than this. Even as we'll see in
| | 02:35 | the next chapter, there's a lot of
technical details that go in to making a good-
| | 02:38 | looking Encore project.
| | 02:40 | But realistically, at the core of
what we're doing, we have done it.
| | 02:44 | This is what it takes to build a project in Encore,
and if you could do what you just did in this
| | 02:48 | chapter, then you'll easily be able to
hang on for all that we cover in this
| | 02:52 | training series. Again, congratulations
are in order for what you've done, and
| | 02:56 | let's get to it in the next chapters where
we start digging a little bit deeper in
| | 03:00 | to really making Encore's sing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Introductory Technical ConceptsUnderstanding disc formats| 00:01 | In this chapter, we are going to look
at several technical issues that will
| | 00:04 | really help you, as we
begin our journey into Encore.
| | 00:08 | First of all, I want to
talk about some disc formats.
| | 00:10 | We know about DVD, and we know about Blu-
ray, which is a High Definition disc,
| | 00:15 | but there are different types of DVDs,
and it's good to know, as you start
| | 00:19 | planning your Projects, good to
know about the different variations of
| | 00:23 | these types of discs.
| | 00:24 | Now DVD is still the most common of the
optical media out there. Most DVDs come
| | 00:31 | in one of two sizes, either Single layer,
which is about 4.7 GB in size,
| | 00:37 | now these are typically the DVDs that
you find, if you go to like Office Depot
| | 00:40 | or some other kind of consumer retail outlet.
| | 00:42 | Then you'll get some DVDs
maybe from Wal-Mart, or whatever.
| | 00:46 | They're usually Single layer DVDs.
Dual layer DVDs can actually store 8.5
| | 00:52 | GB on them, and many, if not
most, of the commercial Hollywood DVDs that
| | 00:58 | you get are Dual layer DVDs.
| | 01:00 | Now a standard, high-quality,
90-minute movie will fit perfectly on a Single
| | 01:05 | layer DVD. A Dual layer DVD is often
used so you can get a longer movie
| | 01:10 | and/or extra special features, interviews,
outtakes, that type of thing on there as well.
| | 01:16 | Now when I say Dual layer, it's
something that you can't really see from
| | 01:19 | looking at the disc.
| | 01:21 | It's something that happens in the disc itself.
| | 01:24 | Then it's also important to know that
Dual layer is not the same thing as Dual
| | 01:27 | Sided, so there are some times when
you get a disc, such as UHF, one of my
| | 01:31 | favorite movies, if you buy the DVD
of UHF, it's Dual Sided, so you could
| | 01:35 | actually flip it over, and there's
wide screen on one side, full screen on
| | 01:39 | other side, and there's some special
features on one side and another special features
| | 01:42 | on the other side, because there's so
much content there. So it is a Dual
| | 01:46 | layer and a Dual Sided DVD.
| | 01:49 | Now a Blu-ray, as we've talked about,
is the new winner in the war for high
| | 01:54 | definition optical disc format, and
it's able to store tons of extra content on
| | 01:59 | it, and it also has some special
features that we will look at in the Blu-ray
| | 02:03 | chapter, such as pop-up menus,
which are not available on DVDs.
| | 02:07 | Now, Blu-rays also have Single and Dual
layers and a Single layer Blu-ray disc
| | 02:13 | has about 25 GB of storage on
it and a Dual layer Blu-ray disc has
| | 02:18 | about 50 GB of storage
space on it, so a lot of power there.
| | 02:24 | Blu-ray hasn't really caught on as fast
as DVDs have, so they are not quite as
| | 02:28 | ubiquitous and also the
compatibility is a little bit off, as of yet.
| | 02:34 | So not everybody has a Blu-ray player,
nor everybody is burning Blu-ray discs
| | 02:37 | on their computers as we see with DVDs.
| | 02:41 | But as of the time of this recording,
all signs point to the fact that Blu-ray
| | 02:44 | will become more and more
popular over the next several years.
| | 02:48 | So again, its good to be aware of
these different disc sizes and these
| | 02:52 | options as you go when you prepare
your disc. If you're planning on making a
| | 02:55 | two hour long movie, and you are
planning on having tons of special features,
| | 02:59 | then you might want get some special
DVDs, either go up to Blu-ray, or get a
| | 03:03 | Dual layer DVD.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| About television standards| 00:01 | There are two main television
standards used throughout the world, and it is
| | 00:05 | good to be aware of these, because we
want to be able to create DVDs for our
| | 00:09 | target audience where the
DVDs will be played back at.
| | 00:12 | So it doesn't matter where you are.
| | 00:15 | It matters where your DVD will be played.
So if you're in Mexico, making a DVD
| | 00:20 | for England, then you want to use the
English settings and not the standards
| | 00:25 | in your own country.
| | 00:28 | Now when you create a new project,
you're presented with the option for
| | 00:31 | choosing a television standard.
The two standards are NTSC, which stands for
| | 00:35 | National Television Standards Committee,
if you're nerdy and like to know the
| | 00:38 | back story, or PAL, also called PAL, short for
Phase Alternating Line, again for the nerds.
| | 00:44 | When a television standard like NTSC
or like PAL is created, it basically
| | 00:49 | determines a lot about the footage.
| | 00:52 | It determines the pixel dimensions.
| | 00:54 | So if I choose NTSC, we can see the
dimensions are set 720 pixels wide by 480
| | 00:59 | pixels tall, but if I choose PAL,
those dimensions change to 720 by
| | 01:04 | 576. Also, the Frame Rate is
29.97, if you're working in NTSC, or
| | 01:11 | 25 frames per second, if you're working in PAL.
| | 01:14 | Now, NTSC is the standard for North
America and Japan, North America being
| | 01:19 | Canada, United States and Mexico, and
also Japan. And PAL is the standard for
| | 01:24 | Europe and Australia, and also several
other smaller countries scattered throughout the
| | 01:29 | world have chosen NTSC and PAL as well.
| | 01:32 | So make sure you check and find out
where country that you're speaking to with
| | 01:36 | your DVD, what their television standard is.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| What is transcoding?| 00:00 | Video comes in all shapes and sizes,
tons of different formats, tons of
| | 00:04 | different ways to compress different files.
| | 00:07 | But when the specifications for DVDs
and Blu-ray discs were made, there were
| | 00:13 | certain rules that DVDs only understand
a certain type of compression, and that
| | 00:18 | is MPEG-2 compression, and Blu-ray Discs
understand MPEG-2 and H264, also called
| | 00:25 | H.264, but those are the only means of
compression that those file types, or
| | 00:30 | those disc types will allow.
| | 00:32 | So whatever video you bring in, it will
probably have to be changed into MPEG-2
| | 00:38 | or H264. In other words, it will need
to be encoded, or an Encore speak, it'll
| | 00:44 | need to be transcoded.
| | 00:45 | Now in the Project panel here, if we
resize this by putting our cursor at the
| | 00:50 | vertical divider between this and the
panel to its right, just stretch this out here,
| | 00:55 | we can see that we have DVD Transcode
Status and also DVD Transcode Settings.
| | 01:00 | So right now, this file that I've just
imported is un-transcoded, so it needs to
| | 01:06 | be transcoded to DVD compliable or
compliant video, before it can burn our DVD.
| | 01:12 | And this process takes a
long a time, a very long time.
| | 01:16 | That's one of the biggest e-mails
I get about Encore is, 'Is it broken?
| | 01:21 | It's been taking hours and hours,' and
yes, if you have a full-length movie,
| | 01:25 | depending on the power of your system, it
could take many hours to transcode video.
| | 01:30 | This is normal.
| | 01:31 | So what you can do is you could right-
click on a video clip, in your Project
| | 01:36 | panel, that you've imported,
and choose Transcode Now.
| | 01:40 | So Encore will allow you to have a
footage being transcoded while you are
| | 01:45 | assembling your project in Encore.
| | 01:49 | If your computer is tough enough to
handle you transcoding in the background
| | 01:54 | while you're assembling your project,
this could save you a lot of time in the end.
| | 01:57 | Now let's talk about Transcode Settings.
| | 01:59 | When you right-click on a clip, you
could also choose Transcode Settings, so go
| | 02:02 | ahead and choose that option.
| | 02:03 | You get the Transcode Settings Dialog
box here, and we can choose transcoding
| | 02:08 | for DVD and for Blu-rays. Since this is
an HD clip, 1280x720, we have the option
| | 02:14 | to transcode for both DVD or Blu-ray.
| | 02:18 | Now, by default, the Quality Preset
for DVD Footage, if you're going to be
| | 02:21 | transcoding DVD Footage, is automatic.
| | 02:24 | That means it's going to make it as
high of a quality as it possibly can.
| | 02:29 | This clip is only 19 seconds long, so we
know that we could fit in hour and a half
| | 02:33 | of really high-quality video on a DVD,
so if it's only 19 seconds long, it's
| | 02:37 | going to be an extremely high quality.
| | 02:39 | But if we brought in another hour and
a half worth of footage, it might have
| | 02:42 | to start compressing all of the extra
files that we're bringing in order make space.
| | 02:47 | So that's what the
automatic Quality Preset means.
| | 02:49 | Now we might have one piece of footage
that is just absolutely amazing, and it
| | 02:52 | needs to be very high-quality.
| | 02:55 | So we could choose one of these High
Quality Presets here. Now this 7Mb, 8Mb,
| | 03:00 | this refers to megabits.
| | 03:02 | This is the Data Rate of the Preset here.
| | 03:05 | We'll talk a little more about this
when we get into bits versus bytes, that
| | 03:08 | can be a little confusing, but it's
good to know about CBR versus VBR.
| | 03:12 | CBR stands for Constant Bit Rate.
| | 03:15 | That means you're going to get the same
constant bit rate, and it's going to go
| | 03:18 | faster when it encodes,
so it's not going to take you as long.
| | 03:21 | But the VBR means Variable Bit Rate.
What that's going to do is actually be a
| | 03:25 | little bit more
intelligent and examine your footage.
| | 03:28 | It's going to kind of look through
it and see where there's patches where
| | 03:31 | it might be able to compress things
little bit more and get away with it and
| | 03:34 | thereby give you higher quality, when
there's action scenes, or something like
| | 03:38 | that, but this does take a lot longer,
because it has to go through two passes.
| | 03:42 | That's what this means here. It has to go
through two passes of your footage to know
| | 03:45 | what it can compress or not.
| | 03:47 | So it takes a lot longer to encode, but
if you could deal with it, then you're
| | 03:50 | going to have a much higher-quality result,
and you're going to be able to fit more onto a disc.
| | 03:55 | Now honestly, once you're in the 7-8
Mb range, I can't tell the difference,
| | 04:00 | honestly, between these.
| | 04:01 | This is pretty high megabit stuff, but
when you get down to like 4 Mb or lower,
| | 04:07 | especially when you are dealing with CBR,
you can start to tell. If you're going
| | 04:10 | down to something like 3 Mb,
it's going to be very obvious.
| | 04:14 | You don't want to do that.
| | 04:15 | So you don't want to cram too much on
a DVD. I mean, you can, and Encore will
| | 04:18 | force itself to continually go lower
and lower on quality, the more stuff you
| | 04:22 | try to jam-pack into a DVD,
but you don't want to do that.
| | 04:26 | So let's say, for example, I want to do the VBR.
| | 04:29 | I could click on this, and go ahead and
click OK here, and I could right-click
| | 04:34 | and choose Transcode Now on this
clip, and I can have it transcoding in the
| | 04:39 | background, so again, when it's time to
burn this to DVD, I don't have to waste
| | 04:43 | time transcoding this asset,
which could take a very long time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting video for Encore| 00:01 | Another common question I get asked a
lot is, 'How do you export video from a
| | 00:05 | video application, and in what way
should you go about doing that?' and there's
| | 00:08 | actually two schools of thought behind that.
| | 00:11 | So I'm using Adobe Premiere Pro, but if
you're using something like Adobe After
| | 00:14 | Effects, or even Final Cut, I believe the
workflow would be very similar to this.
| | 00:17 | I'm going to go to File, and I'm going
to Export > Media, and that's going to open
| | 00:24 | up the Export Settings Dialog box here.
| | 00:26 | What's really cool is that if we go to
the Format dropdown, we actually have
| | 00:30 | settings for MPEG-2 DVD.
| | 00:32 | So we can actually select that, and
then if we were to then encode this from
| | 00:37 | Premiere and bring this back into
Encore, the asset is already transcoded.
| | 00:42 | So it would already say, already
transcoded in Encore, and we wouldn't have to
| | 00:46 | spend really much time at all burning
this to DVD, just the time it would take
| | 00:50 | to actually burn to DVD but, again,
the real bulk of the time here is spent
| | 00:55 | transcoding the asset, so if you're
already transcoding it from Premiere, it's
| | 00:59 | going to save you a lot time on the back end.
| | 01:00 | Now, the even though MPEG-2 is
compatible for DVD, I still recommend
| | 01:04 | choosing MPEG-2 DVD.
| | 01:06 | You also notice that for Blu-ray, we
have H264 Blu-ray and MPEG-2 Blu-ray.
| | 01:11 | Now I mentioned before that there are
two schools of thought. One is that you do
| | 01:16 | this and you choose MPEG-2 DVD, and
then you output this, and it's already
| | 01:20 | transcoded once you bring it into Encore.
| | 01:23 | The other school of thought is
actually where I tend to lean on most projects,
| | 01:27 | and that is I prefer to just output video
from Premiere, or whatever video tool I'm using.
| | 01:32 | Output it with the highest possible quality
settings when bringing it over into Encore.
| | 01:37 | The reason why I do this is because
if I choose MPEG-2 DVD, from my video
| | 01:42 | editing program, and I have it go
through and transcode the assets for me,
| | 01:47 | that's a long process.
| | 01:48 | Sometimes, when I will bring in
something into Encore, I might decide to add
| | 01:52 | more and more to that project later on,
that I didn't even know that I would
| | 01:56 | need to. Maybe the client says, 'Add this.
Add this,' and I wasn't planning on it
| | 02:00 | before, and so maybe the project starts
getting little bit tight, and so Encore
| | 02:04 | might need to compress the
assets a little bit more.
| | 02:06 | Well, if it can't fit completely, it's
going to have to re-transcode it, even if
| | 02:10 | it already is transcoded.
| | 02:12 | That's going to mean that your
files are going to be compressed twice,
| | 02:15 | thereby losing quality.
| | 02:17 | Another reason as is if they're
already transcoded, it going to be harder to
| | 02:21 | place chapter points, which we will talk
about little bit later. But the moral of
| | 02:25 | the story, and the good news here, is
that most video editing programs will have
| | 02:30 | an option for exporting straight to DVD.
| | 02:34 | So it kind of takes the guesswork out
of trying to figure out what settings
| | 02:37 | you need to use.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Bits vs. bytes| 00:01 | Another concept that's good to be
aware of, as it pertains to compression, is
| | 00:04 | that of bits versus bytes.
| | 00:07 | I'm going to right-click on this
clip, and I'm just going to go to
| | 00:09 | Transcode Settings here.
| | 00:10 | As we have looked at before, we had this
Quality Preset here, and we notice that
| | 00:14 | it says 4 Mb and 7 Mb.
| | 00:17 | Well, oftentimes, we see a capital 'B' there.
| | 00:21 | Well that actually makes
a significant difference.
| | 00:23 | If it's a small 'b', this refers to bits
and if we let's say, for example, were
| | 00:28 | to cancel this and go over to the Build
menu, then when we see a 'B' here, it's a
| | 00:34 | capital B, and this is referring to bytes.
| | 00:37 | Typically, we refer to a capital 'B',
bytes when we're talking about data
| | 00:42 | storage. When we're talking about a data transfer rate,
we're talking about bits, with a lower case 'b'.
| | 00:49 | Now there are eight bits in one byte.
| | 00:52 | So these numbers can vary
wildly, so be careful about that.
| | 00:56 | This is one of the reasons why, when we
getting your Internet Service Provider
| | 01:00 | all squared away, the rate sounds so
great. You can get 5 Mb per seconds. It seems
| | 01:05 | like, wow that's about the size of a song.
A song is about 3 or 4-5 MB of music,
| | 01:10 | so that means I can download in seconds.
| | 01:11 | And then when you actually get to using
that Internet speed, it's nothing like
| | 01:16 | that, and the reason why is the
difference between bits and bytes, because the
| | 01:19 | data rate that they are telling you is in
bits, and the file that you're trying to
| | 01:23 | download is in bytes, and so the
same thing applies to Encore DVDs.
| | 01:29 | So oftentimes, when it refers to 7 bits
per second, it's referring to bits and
| | 01:33 | when we are actually talking about
storage, it's bytes, and they don't always
| | 01:36 | match up. And because they don't match
up, sometimes it can be little confusing
| | 01:40 | where you might get a DVD that has
one statement in gigabytes, and then
| | 01:45 | something else might tell you that that DVD
holds a certain amount of gigabits or
| | 01:49 | video that has this many gigabits,
or what have you, so it is just something
| | 01:53 | to be aware of in the back of your
mind, as you're creating your project, and
| | 01:56 | you see a little tiny 'b', know that
its bits and when you see a capital 'B,'
| | 01:59 | know that it is bytes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The importance of bit budgeting| 00:01 | When authoring DVDs, there is a phrase
often heard referred to as Bit Budgeting.
| | 00:05 | Basically, that means that you're aware
of what's going on in your project and
| | 00:09 | how much space has been taken up.
| | 00:11 | Now you might think that you have to
go through and think about how big all
| | 00:15 | these files are going to be, once
they're transcoded and do a bunch of math.
| | 00:17 | You don't have to do that.
| | 00:18 | All you've to do is go
over to the Build panel here.
| | 00:21 | Encore keeps a running tally of
all the stuff used in your project.
| | 00:24 | Right here, in the Disc Info area, you
can open this up here, and change the Size
| | 00:29 | of your DVD, whether it's going to be a
regular 4.7 GB or a dual layer 8.54 GB,
| | 00:36 | how many sides it's going to have, and
| | 00:38 | then there'll be a bar graph here that will go
to the right as you continue to add content.
| | 00:43 | So you can basically see how
much space you've used up.
| | 00:46 | So even though we have tons of stuff
going on in this project, many videos, and
| | 00:51 | there's even a motion menu, so if we are
actually going to render this, we'd see
| | 00:54 | that there is motion with this
default menu we've got from Encore here,
| | 00:58 | even with all this stuff going on,
we've only used up a little bit of what is
| | 01:03 | possible, as far as space
goes within this Project.
| | 01:06 | So again, keep in mind, as you are
plotting out your project, how big everything is,
| | 01:11 | especially if you're doing a DVD for
a full-length movie or for maybe a TV
| | 01:16 | series, keep in mind how things are filling up.
| | 01:20 | As I mentioned before, the default
setting for transcoding stuff is Automatic.
| | 01:24 | So if you bring in too much stuff and
you're not aware of it, then what's going
| | 01:28 | to happen is that Encore is going to
automatically start taking the quality
| | 01:32 | down of your stuff.
| | 01:34 | So make sure you keep a close eye in
the Build panel and this Disc Info area
| | 01:37 | about how much space you've used up
| | 01:39 | to make sure that you don't
accidentally squish your footage too much and
| | 01:44 | lose some quality there.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| About pixel aspect ratios| 00:01 | Another issue to be aware of is
something called the pixel aspect ratio.
| | 00:05 | Essentially, a pixel is a little
square that makes up an image on a computer.
| | 00:11 | On a monitor, on a computer, these are square.
| | 00:14 | They are exactly as wide as they are tall.
| | 00:16 | But on a TV screen, and especially when
we're talking about Standard Definition
| | 00:19 | Video, these are typically not square.
| | 00:22 | It can mess up your final product.
| | 00:26 | Even though what you're seeing
here on Encore looks fantastic,
| | 00:29 | when you go to play it back on your DVD,
it will tend to look stretched, if you
| | 00:32 | don't know what you're doing.
| | 00:33 | Now here is the challenge.
| | 00:35 | I have this piece of footage here,
| | 00:37 | this Explore CA ad.
| | 00:38 | As I click it to select it, the Project
panel gives me a summary at the top of
| | 00:43 | its core attributes,
| | 00:44 | its pixel dimensions,
720 x 480, and its time length,
| | 00:48 | This is saying it's 15
seconds and 13 frames long, and
| | 00:51 | its frame rate. It's 23.976 frames per second.
| | 00:55 | But folks, here is the rub.
| | 00:58 | The difference between standard
definition fullscreen video and widescreen
| | 01:04 | video has nothing to do with pixel dimensions.
| | 01:07 | Yes, you heard that correctly.
| | 01:09 | The difference between fullscreen
video and widescreen video is not the
| | 01:15 | difference in pixels, only
in the aspect of those pixels.
| | 01:20 | So we can't tell just by looking at
this footage, if it's fullscreen standard
| | 01:23 | definition or if it's a wide
screen standard definition.
| | 01:28 | So thus becomes the challenge,
because this is a little bit dangerous.
| | 01:31 | We don't know what we're doing.
| | 01:32 | So if we wanted to make a widescreen menu, and
| | 01:37 | we are going to use
something from our Library here,
| | 01:39 | we want to find a menu that said WIDE, say,
for example, this Radiant menu says WIDE?
| | 01:45 | This is a widescreen menu.
| | 01:46 | So for looking for
something, again, widescreen,
| | 01:49 | we would choose this here.
| | 01:52 | Likewise, of course, you can choose
any menu that had the word Wide in it.
| | 01:56 | Otherwise, if it doesn't have WIDE, if
it's just a regular menu, and it does not
| | 02:00 | say HD, then it's going to assume
fullscreen standard definition.
| | 02:05 | So if I double-click Entertainment menu,
for example, then we have this more
| | 02:09 | squarish orientation.
| | 02:11 | Now other than menus, the real concern
with pixel aspect ratio is when you are
| | 02:18 | creating your assets.
| | 02:19 | So this is more of a help to you, if
you have power over the control of assets.
| | 02:23 | Sometimes when you're working in Encore,
you get stuff later on down the pipeline.
| | 02:27 | You don't have control over the art
that's being created, but if you do have
| | 02:30 | control over that stuff,
| | 02:32 | then make sure that it is created with
the correct output pixel aspect ratio
| | 02:36 | ahead of time, because you
can't change it here in Encore.
| | 02:39 | You can't even tell what it is here on Encore.
| | 02:41 | But if you go and you test your DVD on a
set top player, and you find that it is
| | 02:46 | really stretched out,
| | 02:47 | It is probably because
of the pixel aspect ratio.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| About overscan and safe areas| 00:01 | When you're designing menus, and also
when you're doing a lot of other work in
| | 00:05 | Encore, and if you have the
opportunity to create stuff to bring into Encore,
| | 00:08 | it's good to be aware of a concept
that televisions have called overscan.
| | 00:13 | You see if we were designing this logo
here for print, then this would be fine.
| | 00:19 | We've got a little bit of
extra stuff on the edge.
| | 00:21 | So if we printed it out and whoever
was printing it cropped it, there is
| | 00:24 | plenty of extra room here. We are safe.
| | 00:26 | But when we are designing
for video, this is a no-no.
| | 00:30 | I actually designed this.
| | 00:31 | So this is my own fault, but be aware
that if you were to display something like
| | 00:35 | this on a television set, these edges
would get cut off because of overscan.
| | 00:39 | All televisions understand a signal,
or display a signal, differently.
| | 00:44 | Now here in the Monitor area, if
you're not seeing the Monitor, just
| | 00:46 | double-click the Timeline in the Project panel,
| | 00:49 | you'll see this little
target-looking thing here.
| | 00:51 | Click that to show what are
referred to as the Safe Areas.
| | 00:54 | Because overscan is that attribute,
again, of the television that eats away at
| | 00:58 | the edges, we want to use these Safe
Areas, as they're called, as a guide, to
| | 01:04 | make sure that we have the important stuff in
our projects doesn't get cropped off the screen.
| | 01:08 | So this outer boundary here is
referred to as the Action Safe Area.
| | 01:12 | So any action that we want
to have that's important,
| | 01:16 | we want to make sure
that's inside of this frame.
| | 01:18 | You have to just kind of count on the
fact that like everything outside of this
| | 01:22 | frame could basically be
lost, and probably will be.
| | 01:26 | Now any text that we have, we want to
make sure that it comes on the inside of
| | 01:30 | the inside rectangle, which
is the Title Safe rectangle.
| | 01:34 | So if you have credits or something
else like that, or if you're designing a
| | 01:37 | menu and you have buttons or something,
you want to make sure that those go
| | 01:41 | inside of these Safe Areas,
otherwise they may get cut off the screen and
| | 01:45 | your viewers may not be able to
even read what the buttons are.
| | 01:48 | You could see here this is
terrible design for a video,
| | 01:51 | fine for print, but terrible for video,
because inside this Title Safe Area is
| | 01:55 | really the only stuff that's pretty
much guaranteed to be safe. Everything
| | 01:58 | outside of it may not show up.
| | 02:01 | So you couldn't maybe even read the
word California, because of the way
| | 02:05 | that this was designed.
| | 02:07 | So again, make sure that as you're designing,
| | 02:09 | again, if you have any control over the
creation of assets and videos, you want
| | 02:13 | to make sure that you bring text
inside of this inner rectangle and action
| | 02:17 | inside of the Action Safe
rectangle on the outside here.
| | 02:22 | Plan on this outer rim here,
everything from the Action Safe Area to the
| | 02:27 | edge of the frame, just count on
that probably being tossed out by most
| | 02:32 | television sets.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Creating ProjectsCreating a new project| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to
back up just a little bit and talk about the
| | 00:04 | foundations of Encore and
starting from scratch here.
| | 00:07 | So we're going to talk about
creating a new project this movie.
| | 00:10 | So with this Welcome Screen, go ahead
and click on the New Project button.
| | 00:14 | Here we have all the settings, which
again, might be little intimidating if
| | 00:17 | you're new to DVD
authoring or to the world of video.
| | 00:19 | But fear not, it's not as
challenging as it might seem.
| | 00:23 | First thing, we need to create a
Name and a Location to save our project.
| | 00:27 | So I'm going to go ahead and create a New
Project, or I am going to call it New Project.
| | 00:31 | I'm going to click Browse
to choose where to save it.
| | 00:33 | I'm going to choose the Chapter
04 folder of the Exercise Files.
| | 00:37 | Of course, you could save
yours wherever you'd like.
| | 00:39 | I'm going to go ahead and click Choose.
| | 00:40 | Now be aware that with Encore files,
you'll also find other folders that
| | 00:45 | are created by Encore.
| | 00:47 | So if go back and click the Browse
button, I go back to Exercise Files and look
| | 00:49 | at a previous chapter we've
have done, such as Chapter 03,
| | 00:52 | you could see that there is an
ncor file, ncore and Encore.
| | 00:57 | That's kind of cool. That's the file
extension for an Encore Project.
| | 01:00 | So we made the Bits and Bytes project,
but Encore also created the Bits and
| | 01:04 | Bytes folder with all kinds of extra
data and junk that it uses in the same folder
| | 01:10 | as the Project folder.
| | 01:11 | So I'm going to go ahead and hit Cancel.
| | 01:13 | I just want to show you that Encore does
that, just so you don't think you're crazy.
| | 01:16 | There's are all these folders that
you didn't create on your own, on your hard drive.
| | 01:19 | That's where we choose, in our Project
Settings area here, the Authoring mode, whether
| | 01:24 | it's Blu-ray or whether it's DVD.
| | 01:27 | Now as you could see here in that
Transcode Settings area, this changes based on
| | 01:31 | what we have selected.
| | 01:32 | So if we click Blu-ray, than we
automatically transcode something.
| | 01:36 | These are the Dimension, the Frame Rate,
all that kind of stuff it's going to have.
| | 01:39 | We select DVD,
| | 01:40 | it has a different set of
Dimensions, and other attributes as well.
| | 01:43 | Now as discussed before, this is
also where we choose the Television
| | 01:46 | Standard: NTSC or PAL.
| | 01:48 | I'm just going to go ahead and
set this to DVD, NTSC and click OK.
| | 01:53 | So that's really all there is
to creating a New Project.
| | 01:57 | Now what we could do anytime is go up to the
File menu here and choose Project Settings.
| | 02:02 | If you do some research and you say, you know
what? I actually want to change my project from
| | 02:07 | NTSC to PAL, it's not going to let you do that.
| | 02:10 | So notice that the
Television Standard dropdown is set.
| | 02:14 | So in that case, you'd have to start
all over again with a new project.
| | 02:17 | So again, that's why I mentioned in
the last chapter, you really want to know
| | 02:21 | where your final project is going be output to,
| | 02:23 | so you create that Television
Standard correctly from the first place.
| | 02:27 | However, if you go through and make a
bunch of menus, and you decide, you know what?
| | 02:31 | I asked you want to burn this to Blu-ray,
| | 02:33 | that is not actually a challenge.
| | 02:35 | So you can just change this
Authoring mode to Blu-ray.
| | 02:37 | That will give you access to Blu-ray
features and Blu-ray Transcode Settings.
| | 02:42 | You go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:43 | That's all there is to changing
whether you're going to be outputting to
| | 02:46 | Blu-ray or a DVD.
| | 02:47 | Likewise, if you have your Project set to
Blu-ray, of course, and you can just go back to
| | 02:51 | DVD at any time as well.
| | 02:53 | That's really all you need to
know to create a new Encore project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Touring the interface| 00:00 | Now we've already worked a little bit
with the user interface, but I kind of
| | 00:03 | want to take a movie and just show
you all the tricks here, because it's a
| | 00:06 | very cool, very intuitive interface and
mastering it will make your work much more efficient.
| | 00:12 | Now as discussed, we have a series
of little modules here called panels
| | 00:16 | that contain something with
common themes, such as Properties, or
| | 00:20 | Libraries, Styles, and whatnot.
| | 00:22 | They are grouped together in
groups of panels referred to as a Frame.
| | 00:26 | So in this Frame, there is the
Properties panel, the Character panel.
| | 00:30 | I have a little horizontal scrollbar
here, meaning that there is another panel
| | 00:34 | I'm not clicking at here.
| | 00:35 | So I can grab this little
scrollbar and move it to the right and
| | 00:38 | see that there actually is the Metadata
panel here as well, grouped in the same frame.
| | 00:43 | Now if you want to move
things around, you totally can.
| | 00:46 | Now if you want to your cursor in
between a vertical divider line here, you can
| | 00:50 | click and drag, and move your panels around.
| | 00:54 | Same thing with horizontal bars
between panels to resize things.
| | 00:58 | If you put your cursor at a junction
between several panels here, let's say at this
| | 01:03 | spot, you get a four-way move icon there,
indicating that we could move several
| | 01:07 | panels at once, very handy.
| | 01:10 | Now if you want to move panels to a
different frame, you could do that as well.
| | 01:14 | If I grab the Properties panel, I grab
the name of the Properties panel and move
| | 01:17 | it around, you can see that I get
these little semi-transparent drop zones.
| | 01:21 | If I use one of the outside drop zones,
it indicates that I'm going to create
| | 01:25 | brand-new frame with that panel in it.
| | 01:28 | So if I use one of these side drop
zones here, I make a new frame with just
| | 01:32 | the Properties panel.
| | 01:33 | If I want to group the Properties
panel in with this main Monitor area here,
| | 01:38 | I can click and drag and use the center
drop zone to group panels in the same frame.
| | 01:44 | To get these things back where
they once were, just grab Properties,
| | 01:48 | use the center drop zone in the
previous frame, and there you have it.
| | 01:53 | We could also click and drag to
reorder our panels, just by clicking on a
| | 01:57 | tab with its name on it as well.
| | 01:59 | When you're working on Blu-
ray menus, because they are HD,
| | 02:02 | it's a good idea to have a second monitor.
| | 02:05 | If you have a second monitor setup,
what you can do is hold the Command key on
| | 02:08 | the Mac or the Ctrl key on the PC.
| | 02:11 | This is a dropdown here.
| | 02:12 | So you can't grab the name of this
viewer here, but there is a little grip right
| | 02:15 | here on the left-hand side. You can use that.
| | 02:17 | So hold the Command key or the Ctrl key,
click and drag, and you will create a
| | 02:21 | floating panel here, which then you can
use to put on your second monitor over
| | 02:25 | here, which I actually have set up,
but you can't see it. Just trust me.
| | 02:29 | Take my word on it that I stuck
that over there for a second.
| | 02:31 | So there we have our Menu Viewer back
to where it was, because I simply dragged
| | 02:35 | and dropped to these little grip things here and
| | 02:38 | used the center drop zone again.
| | 02:39 | Now if after all this screwing around, you
find that things are all weird and messed up,
| | 02:45 | that sometimes happens,
| | 02:46 | you can go to the Window menu, go to Workspace,
| | 02:49 | then we just say Reset the Default Workspace.
| | 02:51 | There is a series of workspaces here
for different tasks, such as a Menu Design
| | 02:54 | or Timeline Editing.
| | 02:56 | I'm just going to choose Reset the Default.
| | 02:58 | It says, Are you sure you want to
reset Default to the original layout. Yes.
| | 03:02 | Then we're back to square one here.
| | 03:04 | Now if you ever find that there
is a panel that you're not seeing,
| | 03:06 | let's say, for example, the Library panel,
which is a really important panel here,
| | 03:09 | I click the little X next
to its name to close it,
| | 03:12 | I can always go to the Window menu.
| | 03:13 | That's where I can get all my panels.
| | 03:15 | So I can just choose Window > Library,
and back comes the Library to the same
| | 03:19 | spot it was before, and I could
drag its name around in the tab.
| | 03:22 | So it is on the left here, as it was before.
| | 03:25 | We could also choose different
workspaces from the Workspace dropdown here.
| | 03:29 | One other cool interface tip, the
little Tilde, which is little squiggle
| | 03:33 | that's above the tab key and to the left of
the number one on the main area of the keyboard,
| | 03:37 | if you press that Tilde key, you'll
maximize whatever panel your cursor
| | 03:42 | happens to be over.
| | 03:44 | You could restore it by
pressing the Tilde key again.
| | 03:46 | So I'm going to double-
click this Laptop menu here.
| | 03:49 | Let's say I want to look a little bit
closer at this photo or at the menu, again,
| | 03:52 | hit the Tilde key to zoom in.
| | 03:53 | Hit the Tilde key to zoom back out again.
| | 03:56 | You'll also notice that after I've
zoomed in on a panel, and then zoom back out
| | 04:00 | again, that it has this gold outline around it.
| | 04:03 | This outline around a
panel means that it is selected.
| | 04:07 | This is important, because there are
certain keyboard shortcuts that only work
| | 04:10 | if the correct panel is selected.
| | 04:12 | So be aware of that.
| | 04:15 | Now a lot of these other interface
elements, such as these little flyout menus
| | 04:18 | here, the menu bar at the top, the
tools here and even this search area here,
| | 04:24 | that you can use to search
through Adobe Encore's help, very helpful,
| | 04:29 | a lot of the stuff is
pretty much self-explanatory.
| | 04:31 | You'll just kind of get the
hang of as you begin working.
| | 04:34 | A lot of this stuff also, we'll get
in more detail with as we go throughout
| | 04:36 | this training series.
| | 04:37 | But it's just, again, good to have a
solid foundation of the interface of Encore
| | 04:42 | before moving forward.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing assets as Encore objects| 00:00 | We've seen previously how we can import assets
by simply double-clicking in the Project panel.
| | 00:05 | However, this only imports object as
assets and from there, we can convert things
| | 00:10 | like say, we had video,
| | 00:11 | we can convert that into a timeline.
| | 00:13 | But if we know ahead of time that we
are going to convert an asset into an
| | 00:16 | Encore object, we can save ourselves
a step by right-clicking in the Project
| | 00:20 | panel, choosing Import As, and then
instead of choosing Asset, we could choose
| | 00:24 | the object. So say, for example, I
could choose Import As > Timeline.
| | 00:28 | And that can navigate to a video, such
as Clip05_tahoe in the Video folder, in
| | 00:32 | the Media folder of Exercise Files.
Click Open and not only does that import
| | 00:37 | that video clip as an asset, but also
it creates a timeline and puts that clip
| | 00:41 | in the timeline as well.
| | 00:43 | This saved us a step, but in some
cases, it's absolutely necessary to
| | 00:48 | import things this way.
| | 00:49 | I'm going to right-click
in the Project panel again.
| | 00:51 | I'm going to choose Import As > Menu, this time.
| | 00:54 | Now, in the PSD Files folder of the
Media folder of the Exercise Files, you'll
| | 00:59 | find this Explore CA menu.
| | 01:01 | Now, this is a Photoshop document,
| | 01:03 | as we'll talk about a little bit
more later on in this training series, but
| | 01:06 | I can import this as an asset and use
it as a still image, but there's a lot of
| | 01:11 | layers here, and this is
actually a full-blown menu.
| | 01:14 | If I just import it as a PSD file, as a
still image, then Encore will see it as
| | 01:18 | a still image, and there will be no
way to convert that from that still image
| | 01:23 | to the Encore menu.
| | 01:25 | So we need to import this as a menu in
order for Encore to be able to recognize
| | 01:31 | this as a menu, so it's not just a time saver.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Project panel| 00:00 | As we talked about before, the
Project panel is really key in the Encore
| | 00:04 | workflow because it's where
we import all of our stuff.
| | 00:08 | Now because it's very import all of our
stuff, it's very important to know how to
| | 00:11 | use this panel effectively.
| | 00:13 | Number one, as I mention before when we
select a clip, I'll just click on olive sorting 02,
| | 00:18 | I mentioned before how we get some
important details about this file here at the
| | 00:23 | top, but what I haven't mentioned is that we
actually get a little mini timeline here.
| | 00:27 | So if you wanted to preview a clip,
simply select it, and then you could hit
| | 00:31 | this play icon here in the Project panel.
| | 00:34 | (Noise playing.)
| | 00:39 | It's a rather a loud video,
olives being sorted in a factory.
| | 00:43 | We also get this little timeline here,
which we can click and scrub, so we
| | 00:46 | can just preview our entire video,
just to make sure that this is the right
| | 00:50 | video that we want.
| | 00:51 | There is also - if we resize this
panel here - tons of information about
| | 00:55 | the clip including its type, its duration and
all the transcode stuff we looked at before,
| | 01:01 | also its size, to make sure you don't
get like a low-res version of one that you
| | 01:05 | want actually be a high quality version,
maybe a shortened snippet instead of the
| | 01:09 | real deal. So size can be very helpful,
and also the last time it was modified, a
| | 01:13 | lot of information here.
| | 01:14 | Another thing it's really important about
the Project panels that keep it organized.
| | 01:18 | I mean this is a very small project so far,
but already this is so disgusting to look at.
| | 01:22 | It's distracting. And also, even worse,
it's tough to kind of find away around to
| | 01:27 | see what we need to find.
| | 01:28 | So what I'd like to do is go down
to this new icon again, and the first
| | 01:33 | option is the Folder.
| | 01:34 | I like to create folders.
| | 01:35 | So I'm going to create a
folder for my timelines.
| | 01:38 | I'm just going to call this Timelines.
| | 01:40 | And then I could grab timelines and
drag and drop them into the Timelines
| | 01:46 | folder if I so choose.
| | 01:49 | I'd like to go through and create a
folder for every type of Asset, so I
| | 01:52 | might have created a folder for menus,
a folder for just Assets, a folder for
| | 01:56 | slide shows, and that way when I'm looking for
something, I know exactly where to go to get it.
| | 02:01 | Now, another thing that the
Project panel allows you to do is this
| | 02:04 | little dropdown here,
| | 02:06 | this shows us all the things that we
are allowed to look at, and if there is a
| | 02:10 | checkmark here, then than means that we're
seeing Assets, or menus, or what have you.
| | 02:13 | But oftentimes, such as this, once I
have created timelines, I really don't need
| | 02:18 | to see the Assets here anymore, so
what you could do if you wanted is click
| | 02:22 | Assets to uncheck it, and the Assets
will still be in your project, but you
| | 02:26 | don't have to see that.
| | 02:27 | So the timelines are still here,
and if we double-click on one of them,
| | 02:30 | they still work just fine, but we're just not
seeing the Assets because of this display here.
| | 02:35 | And if we want to see it again, just
go ahead and click it to see them again.
| | 02:38 | Now, I realize that if you're new to
the world of DVD authoring that you
| | 02:42 | probably have like, maybe one movie
that you want to add and you have one menu
| | 02:46 | and one movie, and it's very simple.
| | 02:48 | But trust me, if you're going to do
this for a living or with any kind of
| | 02:51 | substantial complicated project,
you're going to want to learn organization.
| | 02:56 | It's not fun to talk about when you're
wanting to learn a new program, but trust
| | 03:00 | me on this one folks.
| | 03:01 | This is something that you
want to get in habit of doing.
| | 03:03 | To be able to organize your footage, to
be able to find it right when you want
| | 03:06 | to and not just, again, your footage,
but all of the objects in Encore so it
| | 03:09 | starts getting really complex when you
start having these Chapter Playlists,
| | 03:12 | and Timelines, and Slideshows and all the
other objects that we're talking about in Encore.
| | 03:17 | It just gets to be such a big mess in
here and also because when we import files
| | 03:22 | into the Project panel, it doesn't
affect the size of the entire project so you
| | 03:25 | could feel free to import
as much stuff as you want.
| | 03:28 | You're just, again, bringing in links to
the source of footage on your hard-drive.
| | 03:32 | So if you're not sure which piece of
audio to use for a slideshow, you could
| | 03:36 | just import dozens of clips
to see which one works best.
| | 03:39 | And so, the Project panel really
becomes this huge like repository of
| | 03:43 | goodies and information.
| | 03:44 | So it's really important to
keep that sorted and organized.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Creating MenusUnderstanding menus| 00:00 | In the next few chapters, we're going to
look at several key Encore objects in depth.
| | 00:04 | So in this chapter, we're going to look
at menus and next, we're going to look at
| | 00:07 | buttons, and subpictures.
| | 00:09 | Look at this menu. This is a typical
menu, and through this menu, we access the
| | 00:14 | film, special features, different
languages and other bonus items.
| | 00:18 | So really, menus are almost like the way
that you introduce your content to people.
| | 00:24 | If you have an asset that's not
connected to a menu, chances are people will
| | 00:27 | not be able to find it. Even when you
export to Flash, menus become the Web
| | 00:32 | pages that you used to allow
users to go from page to page.
| | 00:36 | So menus really are critical, and
that's why we're talking about menus first.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating menus with the Library panel| 00:00 | We've talked previously about how you
can create menus from the Library panel
| | 00:04 | simply by double-clicking, but what
we're going to do here is we're going to
| | 00:07 | use the Library panel to create separate
elements to actually assemble a custom menu.
| | 00:13 | Now the ultimate custom menu, of course,
is created from Photoshop, and we'll
| | 00:16 | talk about how to do that
later in this training series.
| | 00:18 | For now, go to Library panel, make sure
you're in the General Set here and make
| | 00:24 | sure that we're only seeing menus by
clicking this first button here, and then
| | 00:28 | go to the top, and I want Blank Menu,
not Blank Menu HD, not Blank Menu Wide,
| | 00:33 | but just Blank Menu.
| | 00:35 | And if we double-click that, that will
add this to our project, and now it's
| | 00:38 | basically like an empty canvas that we
can use to take other elements from the
| | 00:43 | Library panel to our menu here to construct it.
| | 00:47 | Now what I'm going to do is go to the
Set dropdown, and I'm going to change
| | 00:50 | this set to Education.
| | 00:52 | Now, you notice that there was like a
little bar that went very quickly through
| | 00:55 | the Library panel as it loaded the
Education Set, but the first time that you
| | 01:00 | load any other Set besides General,
it will take a very long time to load.
| | 01:04 | So if you switch to the Education set,
and you've never done so before, be
| | 01:08 | prepared to wait a good 20 seconds for
that to happen, depending on the speed of
| | 01:12 | your computer, of course.
| | 01:13 | Now, with this first button
selected, we're only looking at menus, but
| | 01:17 | we've already got a menu.
| | 01:18 | So let's go and look at other stuff here.
| | 01:20 | To click the next button, we'll look
at Buttons.Tthe next button will show us
| | 01:23 | images, and they are none in the Education
Set currently, and I could click on backgrounds.
| | 01:28 | And so what I'm going to do is I'm
going to take one of these backgrounds, and
| | 01:31 | I'm going to apply it to my menu.
| | 01:32 | If I want this Chalkboard background to
be my menu background, all I have to do
| | 01:37 | is just double-click it, and it
will automatically go in as part of the
| | 01:40 | background of my menu Set.
| | 01:42 | Now, here is a little trick.
| | 01:43 | If you know ahead of time that you want
a certain background, let's just say the
| | 01:46 | Elephant background, let's just say we
want to make a menu out of this image.
| | 01:51 | All we have to do is drag and
drop it into our Project panel.
| | 01:54 | It will assume that we want to make a
menu with that image as the background.
| | 01:58 | So as you go from set to set, realize
that these background images are basically
| | 02:02 | menus waiting to happen.
| | 02:03 | Just so this isn't confusing, I'm going
to select this Elephant background menu.
| | 02:07 | I'm going to press the Trashcan at the
bottom of the Project panel to delete
| | 02:10 | this, so we can get back to
working on our Chalkboard menu here.
| | 02:13 | Now, we need some buttons on our
background, so I'm actually going to click
| | 02:17 | the Button, and I'm going to go to the top,
and I'm going to select the Chalkboard button.
| | 02:23 | And what I can do is drag and drop
this button wherever I'd like, or I could
| | 02:27 | just double-click it.
| | 02:28 | And it will just kind of
come in somewhere into my menu.
| | 02:31 | Now, this is not where I want these.
| | 02:33 | They should be here in this blank spot,
but I'm going to fix that in next movie.
| | 02:36 | For now, we need to move to get some text.
| | 02:39 | So we could actually type out the
name of our movie or that's a menu, or
| | 02:42 | whatever, but just having
buttons is not quite good enough.
| | 02:46 | So I'm going to go over here to the T,
and here we have different types of text.
| | 02:50 | There is only three for the Education Set,
but if we are in a different Set, like
| | 02:53 | General, the different types of Type
that you can use are really large.
| | 02:58 | A lot of different styles here to play
with, some little outdated and little
| | 03:02 | cheesy, but there are some
good ones in here as well.
| | 03:04 | So I'm going to take the Set back to
Education, and actually I wanted this
| | 03:08 | Chalkboard Button Text, so I can just
double-click or drag and drop, and that
| | 03:11 | comes into my scene here.
| | 03:14 | If we click it, it will not be
selectable anymore unless we click directly on
| | 03:18 | it, so there are kind of challenging to edit.
| | 03:21 | So what we're going to do in the next
movie is to talk about how to edit this
| | 03:24 | mess that we've created.
| | 03:26 | Now these are all the elements that I
need, the buttons and the text, even though
| | 03:29 | they are not set up right, and they are
not in the right place and all that kind
| | 03:33 | of stuff, but I could add more stuff.
| | 03:35 | I could, for example, click on the
Images button and add an image here.
| | 03:39 | And we're not going to do that, but we could.
| | 03:41 | There's no images, again, in the
Education Set, so I could go down to General Set
| | 03:44 | so we can mix and match.
| | 03:46 | We don't have to take all elements from one set.
| | 03:48 | Let's say I want to add a little
plane here, just drag and drop.
| | 03:52 | I put my cursor around the outside
corners here, and we get a double-sided
| | 03:56 | curved arrow, and if we click and drag
with that, we'll be able to rotate this
| | 04:00 | object while it's selected, and we could
move that around and select that, but I
| | 04:04 | don't really want that in my current menu.
| | 04:07 | I'm just going to hit the Delete key to
get rid of it, but we can drag and drop
| | 04:09 | elements from the Library panel in
any category, in any set, into our menu.
| | 04:15 | Now, one final step, I want to start here
in the next movie, so what I'm going to
| | 04:20 | do is I'm going to go to File > Save As,
and then I'm going to go to the Chapter
| | 04:25 | 05 folder of the Exercise Files.
| | 04:27 | And then I'm going to type menu for
Editing, and that way, my work on my menu
| | 04:34 | will be saved, and I can
start here in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing menus| 00:00 | So we have this menu that we
created from scratch in the last movie,
| | 00:03 | well, kind of, it looks
terrible so we got to fix it here.
| | 00:05 | So what I'm going to do is grab my
buttons here and move these into place.
| | 00:10 | I want these to be here. Make sure that
if you have buttons that overlap, they
| | 00:14 | will get this red rectangle so make sure
that you don't have that red rectangle.
| | 00:18 | We'll also talk in later movies about
how we can automatically align these so
| | 00:22 | that they are perfectly lined up and
orderly. For now we're just going to
| | 00:25 | eyeball it here, and actually
maybe I'll move these around.
| | 00:28 | Now, if we try to click on our text to
select it, we won't be able to, and that's
| | 00:33 | because we need to use a
different tool for the job.
| | 00:35 | So I'm going to actually move
over and select this arrow here.
| | 00:38 | This is called the Direct Select tool.
| | 00:40 | This will allow you to select
objects that are not selectable with the
| | 00:43 | regular Selection tool.
| | 00:44 | So now I could click on my menu
text, and we'll put it up top here.
| | 00:49 | And then now I could go ahead and click
on my Type tool and click in this field,
| | 00:54 | select this text, and we'll call this
Happy Times, and then I'm going to click
| | 00:59 | on the Direct Select tool, the
white arrow, move this in to place.
| | 01:03 | If I need to I can scale this down just
by clicking on one of the corner points,
| | 01:08 | I'm going to, actually hold the Shift
key to make sure that the proportions are
| | 01:12 | constrained, so we don't get this.
| | 01:15 | That's what happens if we don't hold Shift.
| | 01:17 | It's easier to hold Shift and make sure
everything's all nice and lined up.
| | 01:20 | And then we could move this into place,
click away, and we're good to go, and
| | 01:24 | now I could go back to my Selection
tool, put these buttons in a better place
| | 01:28 | and there we have our custom made menu, made
from scratch with elements from the Library panel.
| | 01:35 | Now, what we could do, if we want a
total control over the look of our menu, is
| | 01:40 | we could actually select it in the
Project panel and then click this button here
| | 01:42 | in the toolbar this is Edit menu in Photoshop.
| | 01:45 | This will automatically launch Photoshop
and take this menu into Photoshop for editing.
| | 01:50 | Let's go ahead and try that.
| | 01:50 | And you'll get a little warning
here, just go ahead and click OK.
| | 01:54 | And now we have this menu,
again, for further editing.
| | 01:58 | So we could go, open up the Layers panel
here, and I'll double-click the Adjustments panel.
| | 02:02 | And then I'm going to go down to the
bottom of the Layers panel, click this
| | 02:05 | little half-black/half-white circle here.
| | 02:07 | Let's go ahead and select Curves, and
then we could maybe drag this point down a
| | 02:13 | little bit to darken the Chalkboard,
if we wanted to, click this point in the
| | 02:17 | upper right-hand to brighten the brightness.
| | 02:20 | And so we've basically increased the
contrast of our menu, and it made it a
| | 02:26 | little bit more striking.
| | 02:27 | We could come back down to the Layers
panel, and we can click the eye to see the
| | 02:30 | before and the after.
| | 02:32 | And if you're a Photoshop guru, let me just
double-click the word Adjustments so we
| | 02:36 | can see more of our layers here,
| | 02:37 | then you can go in and really
customize any component here.
| | 02:41 | Let's say, for example, Happy Times, if
you wanted to add a layer style to that
| | 02:45 | here in Photoshop, you could do that.
| | 02:46 | If you wanted to change the color of
Lesson One, or the check box, or the chalk
| | 02:51 | underline, or these pieces over here,
anything you could do in Photoshop, you
| | 02:55 | have access to it because these are
all different layers, different little
| | 02:57 | components that you could tweak in Photoshop.
| | 02:59 | Now, just so that the change is a
little bit more dramatic, I'm going to add
| | 03:02 | another adjustment layer by selecting
the Curves adjustment layer at the top.
| | 03:05 | Going back to the half-black/half-
white circle at the bottom of the Layers
| | 03:08 | panel, and then I'm going to
choose Hue/Saturation right there.
| | 03:12 | And I'm going to adjust the Hue a
little bit, while is going to tweak things
| | 03:17 | considerably, and I think I
like that a little bit better.
| | 03:20 | It's a little bit screwy, but I'm
just trying to make a point here.
| | 03:23 | I'm going to hit Command+S to save,
and then if I go back to Encore, we could
| | 03:27 | see that the changes that we made in
Photoshop are automatically updated here in Encore.
| | 03:33 | So again, one of the things that we
will keep stressing throughout this
| | 03:35 | training series is is it's good to know
Photoshop if you're going to be working
| | 03:39 | in Encore seriously.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Menu Viewer vs. the Menus panel| 00:00 | If you double-click a menu in a
Project panel, it will open up in a panel
| | 00:04 | called the Menu Viewer.
| | 00:06 | And this is where we can make some
adjustments and see different things down
| | 00:09 | here that we'll talk about later
at the bottom of the Menu Viewer.
| | 00:13 | But it can be a little confusing
because you might think of this as the Menu
| | 00:16 | panel, but over here
there is the Menus panel also.
| | 00:20 | So what's the deal?
| | 00:21 | Well, they serve different purposes.
| | 00:23 | The one that we looked at to see our
menu is called the Menu Viewer, and this is
| | 00:28 | to referred to as the Menus panel.
| | 00:30 | So the Menus panel is to allow us
to look at our menu at a glance.
| | 00:34 | It's extremely helpful, so I could
click on a menu here and when we click that
| | 00:38 | menu to select it down below here, it
will show us all kinds of information
| | 00:42 | about our menu, specifically each button.
| | 00:46 | So if I look at Big fish prize, if I
go back to my menu you could see that
| | 00:50 | the menu button names are Big Fish Prize, Take
Home Pay, Excursion - Day 1 and preparations.
| | 00:55 | These are the same buttons here.
| | 00:56 | And again, a lot of the stuff
is going to make sense later on.
| | 00:58 | A very important feature called End
Action Override, so we could see the end
| | 01:02 | action override at a glance, and tons
of other information, including the Link.
| | 01:07 | So if we could see that's Not Set
then we know that that button is not
| | 01:10 | connected to anything.
| | 01:11 | So this can be a very helpful way to
look at information about the menu itself
| | 01:17 | and also each button at a glance.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating motion menus| 00:00 | When we're dealing with menus,
sometimes, in this day and age, especially, just
| | 00:04 | having a static image in the background
may not be what you want all the time.
| | 00:09 | If you're just making a DVD of home
movies or whatever, then the menu doesn't
| | 00:13 | need to be that spectacular.
| | 00:14 | But if you're making it for a
client and you really want it to be very
| | 00:18 | impressive and engaging, you could
actually create motion in the background.
| | 00:22 | This is referred to as a Motion menu.
| | 00:25 | I'm going to show you two
different ways to do that.
| | 00:27 | First of all, let's turn our
attention back to the Library panel, and I've
| | 00:30 | clicked on this Menu button to see only menus.
| | 00:34 | Most of the icons here are very similar,
but every once in a while, we'll see
| | 00:39 | a menu with like a folded over, dogeared
flap in the upper right-hand corner there.
| | 00:45 | That indicates that this menu is different
from the others, because it is a Motion menu.
| | 00:50 | See, this is a regular old menu that
we're looking at here, and it's just a
| | 00:53 | still image in the background, and that's fine.
| | 00:55 | But this one right here, again, with
the folded over corner, indicates if we
| | 00:58 | were to add this to our project,
this is actually a Motion menu.
| | 01:02 | This is not a still image in
the background. This is a movie.
| | 01:05 | So this particular movie has, like, this
3D rendered baby crib, which is really cool.
| | 01:09 | Actually, what we're going to do is go
to the Corporate set, and then we are
| | 01:13 | going to scroll down here, and we
are going to go to the Clock menu.
| | 01:18 | Go ahead and double-click the Clock menu,
which, again, as you could tell by the
| | 01:20 | folded over corner of the icon, is a Motion menu.
| | 01:23 | So double-click that to
add that to your project.
| | 01:25 | When you add that to your product, it
not only adds the menu to your project,
| | 01:29 | but the accompanying movie
that is the menu's background.
| | 01:32 | Now if we were to preview this menu,
we would not see any of the motion, by
| | 01:38 | default, because these Motion
menus must be rendered first.
| | 01:43 | So to render this Motion menu, we're going
to go to the File menu > Render > Motion menus.
| | 01:52 | After a minute or two, the render will
be complete and ready to preview this
| | 01:56 | Motion menu, and I'm just going to
right-click on the menu itself, the
| | 02:00 | NTSC_Clock menu, and I'm
going to choose Preview from Here.
| | 02:03 | We haven't really connected this
anywhere to our project, but we just want to
| | 02:06 | preview this object and choosing Preview from
Here will allow us to preview just this object.
| | 02:11 | We could see this really cool clock
animation going on, and this happens in our
| | 02:16 | background while the viewers are just
kind of hanging out looking at the menu.
| | 02:21 | So this is much more stimulating and engaging
than just a simple still image in the background.
| | 02:26 | Again, not appropriate for every
audience or for every project, but for those
| | 02:30 | ones where you want to make a strong
impression, Motion menus can really make a difference.
| | 02:34 | Let me go ahead and click Exit and Return here.
| | 02:37 | There might be times when you
want to make your own Motion menu.
| | 02:40 | So I'm going to double-
click this NTSC_Blank menu.
| | 02:43 | As you can see, it's not a blank menu.
| | 02:44 | I've added a background, and I've
added some buttons and some text here.
| | 02:48 | But I also have my own video clip, and
what I want to do is add my own video clip
| | 02:53 | as the background video to this menu here.
| | 02:56 | So what I'm going to do is hold the
Option key on the Mac or the Alt key on the
| | 03:00 | PC while I drag this video to the background.
| | 03:04 | Again, you need to hold down the
Option or Alt key as you're dragging to do
| | 03:08 | this, but once you do, it replaces the
background and puts your video as the new background.
| | 03:13 | So now, again, I need to go to File >
Render > Motion menus, which will render
| | 03:18 | this background, and then will
allow us to preview this as a video.
| | 03:23 | So now that that's rendered, I'm going
to, again, right-click on the menu and
| | 03:26 | choose Preview from Here, beautiful!
| | 03:28 | So as you could see our video in the
background, and it play while viewers are
| | 03:33 | waiting to make their choice.
Again, it's just a much more engaging way of
| | 03:38 | presenting information.
| | 03:39 | Now, it's important that you don't confuse
Motion menus with what I call Video menus.
| | 03:44 | Motion menus, as we've been talking
about here, are basically just a menu, and
| | 03:48 | the background is video.
| | 03:49 | Later on in this training series when
we get into advanced cool tricks and
| | 03:53 | tips later on, I'm going to show you
how to actually take a video and make
| | 03:56 | that an entire menu.
| | 03:58 | So the buttons can be videos as well.
| | 04:02 | But for now, you've got to admit,
it's a pretty cool trick.
| | 04:04 | I challenge you to go out
and play in the Library panel.
| | 04:07 | Look through the different sets. Look
through the different Motion menus. Make
| | 04:10 | your own Motion menus.
| | 04:11 | Bring in videos of your own.
| | 04:12 | Put those as backgrounds and menus
and see what you can come up with.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| About submenus| 00:00 | As you are meandering your way through
the Library panel, you will find that
| | 00:05 | when there is a menu, there
is an accompanying submenu.
| | 00:09 | That's what we're going
to look at in this movie.
| | 00:10 | So I've added this Pro menu from the
Government set to our project here, and we
| | 00:15 | have all these different links.
| | 00:17 | Let's say, for example, that the
Investors movie isn't actually a movie, but
| | 00:22 | several movies of different investors.
| | 00:24 | So what we could do is
double-click the Pro Submenu.
| | 00:28 | And essentially, what we have is a menu based
on the same visual theme, but the
| | 00:32 | opportunity to choose scenes.
| | 00:35 | That's typically what we use
submenus for is for scene selections.
| | 00:40 | These little buttons here are video
buttons that will allow you to put
| | 00:44 | thumbnails from your videos so that
people could actually see different scenes.
| | 00:48 | We'll talk about how to
do that little bit later.
| | 00:50 | So what I would do in this case would be
to double-click the Pro menu to open it up,
| | 00:54 | select the Investors button, and then
in the Properties panel, drag the pick
| | 00:58 | whip from the link over to the Submenu.
| | 01:01 | So that way, they might click on
timelines when these buttons are clicked.
| | 01:05 | When the user clicks Investors, then the
link opens up the Submenu, and they can
| | 01:10 | choose which investor to learn more about.
| | 01:13 | Now, you might be tempted to just
kind of avoid this whole Submenu, Chapter
| | 01:16 | Selection menu thing, but I strongly
recommend that if you have something that's
| | 01:20 | going to be longer than just a few
minutes, that you do create one of these
| | 01:24 | scene selection submenus,
because it's very helpful to viewers.
| | 01:28 | Not everybody can sit through an
entire presentation, even like a movie.
| | 01:31 | Sometimes life just happens and people
are called away, and they want to come
| | 01:34 | back, and they don't want to have to
fast forward through the entire thing and
| | 01:37 | so allowing them to jump back
into the project is very helpful.
| | 01:40 | You could also, if there's buttons
like this here, Previous and Next buttons,
| | 01:45 | you could create multiple
Chapter Selection menus.
| | 01:47 | So you might have 20 different
investors or 20 different scenes in your movie
| | 01:51 | and so you can continue to add another
Submenu, because not all of my scenes
| | 01:57 | will fit in this Chapter Selection menu.
| | 01:59 | Then we could just link the Next button
to the Submenu and so on and so forth.
| | 02:03 | So submenus then are a great way for
your users to be able to jump in and get to
| | 02:10 | the spot of your content
that they want to go to.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Creating ButtonsThe anatomy of a button| 00:00 | Now we're going to turn our
attention to look at buttons,
| | 00:03 | but what exactly is a button?
| | 00:05 | What makes up a button?
| | 00:06 | That's what we're going to
look at in this movie here.
| | 00:08 | I have here a menu, and we
have several buttons here.
| | 00:12 | If you look, we have a few components.
| | 00:14 | We have the text of the button.
| | 00:17 | We have a little graphic element that
suggests the button even when we're not
| | 00:22 | activating that particular button.
| | 00:23 | So even if we had success stories
activated, we could still see there's little
| | 00:27 | rectangles for these other buttons here.
| | 00:30 | There's another component as well.
| | 00:32 | I'm going to right-click on this NTSC_
Organic menu and choose Preview from Here.
| | 00:37 | When we select a button with our
DVD remotes, there is often a little
| | 00:41 | extra picture here called a subpicture
highlight, or often referred to as just a highlight.
| | 00:47 | This denotes that a button is selected.
| | 00:51 | So it doesn't mean that we've
actually chosen that option.
| | 00:53 | It just means that that is the
option that we have currently selected.
| | 00:57 | This, of course, tells the viewer
that if they want to watch, for example,
| | 01:00 | 30-year plan, go ahead and push play now,
because that's what you have selected.
| | 01:04 | So we have here three components,
but they're not always necessary.
| | 01:09 | Let's go ahead and close this.
| | 01:10 | I'm going to click either
Exit here or Exit and return.
| | 01:13 | With this menu selected here, I'm going
to click in the Menu Viewer to select it.
| | 01:17 | Let's go over to the Layers panel.
| | 01:20 | Again, if you're familiar with
Photoshop, this will feel very second nature
| | 01:23 | to you, because basically the layers here are
referring to the layers in the Photoshop file.
| | 01:30 | Buttons are actually a layer
group in the Photoshop file.
| | 01:34 | If we open up the layer group, in
other words, these little folders here, we
| | 01:37 | could see these different components.
| | 01:39 | As mentioned, we have the
Bracket here, the graphic element.
| | 01:42 | We have the text, denoted by the little T here,
the T icon, mission statement in this case.
| | 01:48 | Then we also have the Highlight.
| | 01:49 | Notice that the visible elements have
Eyes next to them, and there is no Eye
| | 01:54 | icon next to the subpicture
Highlight, so we can't see it right now.
| | 01:58 | We'll talk much more about subpicture
highlights towards the end of this chapter.
| | 02:02 | But we don't necessarily need all of these
components, and we could have several more.
| | 02:07 | So some of these, like the Bracket, are
just design elements, and Encore doesn't
| | 02:11 | necessarily need those.
| | 02:13 | What I do recommend that you have
is text and a subpicture Highlight.
| | 02:18 | This tells people what they are
selecting and if something is selected or not.
| | 02:23 | Now later on when we get in the fun
and games section of Encore, the advanced
| | 02:27 | stuff later on the training series,
we'll talk about how you can create a button
| | 02:30 | without text, without a bracket and
just a secret subpicture highlight, and you
| | 02:34 | could use that to store
secret content on your discs.
| | 02:38 | We refer to that type of content as Easter eggs.
| | 02:40 | So we'll talk about how to do that later on.
| | 02:42 | Let's look at another example of buttons.
| | 02:44 | I'm going to open up this NTSC_Atomic menu.
| | 02:47 | This is a little bit more complex menu.
| | 02:49 | There are these things called replacement
layers here, which we'll talk about later.
| | 02:52 | There's also a Motion menu background, and yet
still, what makes buttons up here are the same.
| | 03:00 | We have a green background, and
then we have the text, and there's a
| | 03:03 | subpicture highlight.
| | 03:04 | So if we open up one of these, say, for
example, Alpha here, we could see that
| | 03:08 | there's a subpicture highlight,
ALPHA text, and the button background.
| | 03:13 | So be aware that that is really the
nuts and bolts of what a button is.
| | 03:17 | It's a folder in Photoshop
with these special codes.
| | 03:21 | This is what tells Encore when you
bring in a Photoshop document, what
| | 03:26 | exactly this object is.
| | 03:27 | So this code means something.
| | 03:29 | This code means a highlight.
| | 03:31 | We'll talk a lot later about these
different codes that we could put in our
| | 03:34 | documents in Photoshop.
| | 03:36 | But for now, just know that a button
is a series of objects grouped into
| | 03:40 | a folder.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating buttons| 00:00 | Encore actually allows you to turn
anything into buttons. As we saw in the last movie,
| | 00:04 | buttons can be a
component, like a graphic component.
| | 00:07 | It could be text, a subpicture or any
one of those, and Encore allows you to just
| | 00:12 | select one and make it a button.
| | 00:14 | So let's go ahead and right-click in
the Project panel, go to Import As > Menu,
| | 00:19 | and let's go to the PSD Files folder, in
the Media folder, in the Exercise Files.
| | 00:23 | Let's go ahead and choose
Hansel and Petal menu.psd.
| | 00:26 | Let's go ahead and choose Open,
and notice that we have a menu here.
| | 00:30 | Let me just resize this so
| | 00:32 | this is a little bit bigger.
| | 00:33 | Now what I neglected to do when I
created this menu is to specify a button.
| | 00:39 | So if we go over to Layers panel, and
actually let me click on the Menu Viewer to
| | 00:43 | select our menu here, you could see
that we don't have any menu buttons.
| | 00:47 | There are no codes here.
| | 00:49 | So what I want to do is take this
flower and this text, which is grouped into
| | 00:53 | this folder, Group 1, and
make this into a button.
| | 00:57 | Even if I don't know the codes, I can
select this group, and I can go over to
| | 01:02 | the Object menu and simply
choose Convert to Button.
| | 01:05 | It adds the codes for me, and now we
have our text, and we have our little
| | 01:10 | graphic representation.
| | 01:11 | We don't really need either one
of those, but both are a good idea.
| | 01:14 | And so now we have them.
| | 01:16 | But again, we could pretty
much turn anything into a button.
| | 01:18 | We could go to Library panel and in the
General set, I'm going to go to images
| | 01:23 | here, and I might choose a rocket, which
is awesome, and drag and drop that on to
| | 01:30 | our Hansel and Petal ad, which
thematically does not work really well, but we're
| | 01:33 | going to go with it.
| | 01:34 | With the Rocket selected, I'll go to
Object > Convert to Button and boom!
| | 01:39 | That is now a button.
| | 01:40 | When it's selected, we can create
links to this or from this, so if someone
| | 01:45 | chooses the Rocket, it can go somewhere.
| | 01:48 | So basically, anything that we need,
any text that we create in Encore here can
| | 01:53 | be converted to a button.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing buttons| 00:00 | If you ever need to edit buttons, or
rather, edit the components of buttons, it's
| | 00:04 | just as easy as creating them.
| | 00:05 | Here we have a menu that I've put a
little bit more effort into, and we
| | 00:09 | have this Set Up button looking
pretty good here, a cloud with the text
| | 00:13 | setup centered in it.
| | 00:15 | But here we have Scenes as text
moving off of the cloud. That's not good.
| | 00:19 | And here we have the Play All
text in the right spot, but the clouds move.
| | 00:22 | So what I want to do is move the cloud
part of this button and with the text
| | 00:25 | part of this button and fix things.
| | 00:27 | But when we click on these buttons,
all we get are the buttons themselves.
| | 00:31 | I'm just going to undo that by
hitting Command+Z or Ctrl+Z on the PC.
| | 00:35 | What I need access to, in this
situation, are the individual components of the
| | 00:39 | button, the text, the cloud.
| | 00:41 | So what I'm going to do is choose the
white arrow, the Direct Select tool.
| | 00:45 | Usually, it's a general rule that the
Selection tool selects entire objects or
| | 00:50 | groups of objects, and then if you need
to whittle down and select a component
| | 00:54 | or a piece of that object, then that is
what we use the Direct Select tool for.
| | 00:59 | So what I'm going to do now with my
white arrow, my Direct Selection tool, is
| | 01:03 | click on any one of these components.
| | 01:04 | I'll click on the cloud here.
| | 01:06 | Now I could click and drag
and move the cloud into place.
| | 01:10 | I could also click and drag the
Scenes text and move that into place.
| | 01:15 | So again, we can adjust the
individual components of buttons, not just the
| | 01:20 | entire button itself, by
using the Direct Select tool.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Viewing and adjusting button routing| 00:00 | Button routing allows your viewers
to control how buttons are selected.
| | 00:05 | This is especially important in
complex menus such as submenus like this,
| | 00:10 | where there are buttons that allow you go back
to a previous submenu or to the next submenu.
| | 00:16 | There are multiple buttons,
and there's a Main menu button.
| | 00:19 | So how do your viewers go from button to button?
| | 00:23 | Now first we want to make sure that
our menu is showing in the Menu Viewer.
| | 00:27 | You could do that by double-
clicking it in the Project panel here.
| | 00:30 | Next, we need to show the button routing.
| | 00:34 | To do that, go down here at the bottom
of the Menu Viewer to this button and
| | 00:38 | click that, which will
show you the button routing.
| | 00:41 | So this 1 here in the center indicates
this one button is, in fact, button 1.
| | 00:47 | Then this is button 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and then, in
a weird twist of craziness, this is button 7.
| | 00:55 | This is button 8, and then
the Main menu is button 9.
| | 01:00 | Now the numbers on the outside of the
center tell you what would happen if
| | 01:04 | a viewer had that button selected and
then pushed that direction with their remote.
| | 01:11 | This is a little bit screwy, and a lot
of times the default button routing for
| | 01:16 | the default menus, or the menus that
come with Encore, are little bit off and
| | 01:20 | I actually haven't changed any of this,
| | 01:21 | so this is actually the way it comes to you.
| | 01:23 | So in other words, if I'm on button 4,
for example, and as a user, I push the Up
| | 01:29 | button on my DVD remote, it's going to
take me to button 6, which is down here.
| | 01:35 | That doesn't make any sense to me.
| | 01:36 | I mean, if I was a user, to me, in my
mind, and I was on button 4 and I push the
| | 01:41 | Up button, I would think that it
would take me to this button here.
| | 01:44 | So I want to change that.
| | 01:45 | That's kind of screwy to me.
| | 01:46 | Also, if I was on button 4 and if I
push the right direction, I think that I
| | 01:52 | would be going to the Main menu.
| | 01:54 | But no, I go back to number 1, which
seems very counterintuitive to go to the
| | 01:59 | left when I actually push to the right.
| | 02:02 | Really, the only way to get back to the
Main menu button is to somehow get back
| | 02:08 | to one of these buttons, button 7 or 8,
and then push up, if you're on button 8,
| | 02:13 | or down if you're on button 7.
| | 02:15 | That's just anarchy. That's crazy.
| | 02:16 | I wanted to be able to be easier for
my users to change things than that.
| | 02:21 | But there's not much we can do until we go
back and select the menu in the Project panel.
| | 02:26 | When the menu is selected in our
Project panel, you could see it in
| | 02:29 | the Properties panel.
| | 02:31 | Then in the Menu properties, there is an
option that says Automatically Route Buttons.
| | 02:35 | If this is chosen, then you have no
control over how the routing of the buttons goes.
| | 02:41 | So before we change things, we need
to click this to deselect it, giving us
| | 02:45 | total control over button routing.
| | 02:48 | So now we can go, and I could select
button 4, for example, and click on the
| | 02:52 | right tab, I get a little hand here.
| | 02:54 | I could click and drag this to button 9.
| | 02:58 | Now it makes it so that when viewers
click to the right, they will go to
| | 03:01 | the Main menu button.
| | 03:03 | If I want them to go back to button 7, I
could click and drag on the 6 here, and
| | 03:08 | they will go to button 7.
| | 03:11 | If they're here and I want them to
go direct to button 8, if they click
| | 03:14 | left, which makes more sense to me, then I'll
click and drag and move this over to button 8.
| | 03:19 | So using this, we can control
button routing, giving our users a very
| | 03:23 | predictable and intuitive user experience.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating video buttons| 00:00 | When you create Scene Selection menus
and stuff along those lines, having Text
| | 00:05 | buttons is not very descriptive.
| | 00:07 | How are people going to know
which of those buttons to click on?
| | 00:10 | So we usually use Video buttons,
or buttons with video previews.
| | 00:14 | So what we need to do is
go to the Library panel.
| | 00:18 | I am going to choose the Wedding Set.
| | 00:20 | And I clicked on the Display button
here, so we are only looking at buttons.
| | 00:23 | And I am going to go down to
the Rose Video Button here.
| | 00:26 | I am going to drag and drop this into our scene.
| | 00:30 | This is a really big button
that's meant for an HD menu.
| | 00:33 | So I am going to grab the corners here.
| | 00:35 | I'm going to hold the Shift key to
resize this, make this a little bit smaller.
| | 00:39 | I can also hold the Option key
down to scale it from the center.
| | 00:43 | That will be the Alt key on the PC,
make that little bit smaller and go ahead
| | 00:48 | and click outside of it to accept it.
| | 00:50 | When you see buttons like this, it
basically means that you are supposed to put
| | 00:54 | content, or video, inside of this
little square. So what I can do,
| | 00:59 | one of the things I can do is to take
my Timeline here of this footage of some
| | 01:04 | flowers, and drag this Timeline into
this Video button, and then the video goes
| | 01:12 | inside of the button.
| | 01:14 | Now, when people want to preview
different scenes, they have a thumbnail, a
| | 01:18 | little clip playing, to show
them what that scene looks like.
| | 01:22 | If you want this to actually play the
video inside the button, there is a couple
| | 01:27 | things you need to do.
| | 01:28 | First of all, we need to go to the menu,
then go over to the Properties panel
| | 01:33 | with the menu selected, and
then click on the Motion tab.
| | 01:36 | By default, you are on the Basic tab here,
so you need to click on the Motion tab.
| | 01:40 | And you need to check Animate
Buttons, which is unchecked, by default.
| | 01:45 | So again, this is unchecked, by default.
| | 01:47 | So by default, it will just be a still
image representation of your clip here,
| | 01:51 | your video Timeline.
| | 01:52 | So if you want to see this moving, you
need to check Animate Buttons, and then
| | 01:56 | we also need to render this the
same way we render Motion menus.
| | 02:00 | So let's go to File > Render > Motion menus.
| | 02:07 | So with that rendered, we could then right-
click on the menu, choose Preview from Here.
| | 02:14 | Now as you can see, once that plays back, we
have video playing back inside of our button.
| | 02:20 | Now again, the four steps that you
need to make this magic happen is that one,
| | 02:25 | you need a video button, two, you need
to drag footage into the Video button,
| | 02:29 | three, you need to check Animate
Buttons in the Menu properties, in the
| | 02:34 | Properties panel, and four,
you need to render Motion menus.
| | 02:39 | One little piece of advice.
| | 02:41 | When you are creating
Video buttons, they are great.
| | 02:45 | They add a lot of pizzazz to your menus.
| | 02:48 | And it's great if you only have one
or two buttons, but if you have a huge
| | 02:51 | Submenu full of 6, 8, 10, 12 Video
buttons, and they're all going concurrently,
| | 02:58 | they're all moving,
| | 02:59 | that could be a little noisy.
| | 03:01 | So just keep in mind, as you are
creating your Video buttons, to make sure that
| | 03:05 | your menus are not overkill, there's too
much going on with all of these Video buttons.
| | 03:10 | But used appropriately, Video buttons
can help your viewers understand a little
| | 03:15 | bit more about the scene
that they are going to watch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding subpicture states| 00:00 | So now we are going to turn our
focus to subpictures, and beginning that
| | 00:04 | discussion, we are going to
look at the states of subpictures.
| | 00:07 | There are three states, and this is
very similar to Web design, if you
| | 00:10 | are familiar with that.
| | 00:12 | There is the Nothing State, so
when an object is not selected.
| | 00:16 | Then we have the subpicture
State where something is selected.
| | 00:20 | Then we have a very brief period where the
button is actually chosen by the user and selected.
| | 00:26 | Now we could preview these states by
going to the bottom of the Menu Viewer, and
| | 00:30 | we have these three buttons here.
| | 00:31 | So we Normal, and this
is when it's not selected.
| | 00:35 | This is Selected, and this is what
the subpicture looks like when it is
| | 00:40 | selected, and this is the Activated State.
| | 00:43 | Now for 90% of buttons, you are going to
have the Activated State the same exact
| | 00:49 | thing as the Selected State, because
again, it's just a very brief split second.
| | 00:53 | So let's say we have the
behind the scenes button here.
| | 00:55 | And while it's selected, it looks like this.
| | 00:58 | And then when we press it, the brief
amount of time that it takes the DVD
| | 01:02 | player to acknowledge that it has
been selected and then load the actual
| | 01:07 | behind the scenes link, whatever it
links to, that is the time that we will see
| | 01:12 | the Activated subpicture highlight,
which is, again, a very brief period of time.
| | 01:15 | So most of the time, this Activated
State will be the same as the Selected State.
| | 01:20 | Be aware that as you're working on
design of your menus and stuff, that when
| | 01:25 | you use these subpicture states that you click
them to get back to the main way that they look.
| | 01:30 | Otherwise, you are going to be looking
at the subpictures, and that might throw off
| | 01:34 | your design a little bit.
| | 01:34 | So again, click it again to deselect
it and get back to the regular way of
| | 01:39 | looking at your menu.
| | 01:40 | So those are the
different states of subpictures.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing subpicture colors| 00:00 | All right, folks.
| | 00:01 | Prepare yourself for this.
| | 00:02 | This is going to be one of the most
mentally challenging ideas and concepts and
| | 00:08 | features in Encore in this entire
training series, but also in this entire
| | 00:12 | program to work with.
| | 00:14 | I am going to talk about changing
the color of subpicture Highlights.
| | 00:17 | You might want to go on with the rest
of training series, come back to this
| | 00:20 | later if you need it, because
again, it is a very advanced concept.
| | 00:24 | Adobe has done a great
job with this, in my opinion.
| | 00:26 | But just the way that DVDs have
been set up are very limiting as far as
| | 00:31 | subpicture colors go, and so
it's a little bit daunting of a task.
| | 00:34 | Now, if I go ahead and show the
selected state of the Subpicture Highlight, we
| | 00:39 | can see the Subpicture
Highlight here. The Subpicture,
| | 00:42 | it's important to know, is just an area
that is a solid color, and that's all it is.
| | 00:48 | We cannot have shades of color.
| | 00:50 | We cannot have an image as a subpicture per se.
| | 00:53 | Again, later on in the training
series I will show you creative ways to get
| | 00:56 | around that, but a subpicture on its
own, a true subpicture, is just really
| | 01:01 | a flat area of color.
| | 01:03 | So here's how we change this.
| | 01:05 | I'm going to go and click the menu and
the Menu Viewer, make sure it's showing
| | 01:10 | in the Properties panel as a menu here.
| | 01:12 | Then go to the Menu menu at the top of
the screen, which is kind of fun to say,
| | 01:17 | then choose Edit Menu Color Set.
| | 01:19 | Okay, an Edit Menu Color Set gets you to
the Menu Color Set dialog, which allows
| | 01:24 | you to change the colors of
your subpicture highlights.
| | 01:29 | By default, the Color Set is set to
Automatic, which means that the Selected and
| | 01:34 | Activated States are the same, and the
color for the Subpicture Highlight is
| | 01:38 | obtained automatically from the menu by Encore.
| | 01:41 | So Encore looks at your menu and says hey!
| | 01:43 | That looks like a bluish menu and then
automatically chooses this blue color.
| | 01:48 | So if you want to manually change the
color, we need to change the Color Set
| | 01:51 | from Automatic to Menu Default.
| | 01:54 | That opens up these values, and we can
now choose to use these different values.
| | 01:59 | So the Normal Group, by default, is
set to Black, but the Opacity is 0%,
| | 02:05 | so basically, an invisible
Subpicture Highlight, still there, but
| | 02:09 | completely transparent.
| | 02:11 | By the way, if you want to preview
different states you can check Preview here,
| | 02:14 | and then this is what it looks like normally.
| | 02:16 | This is what it looks like selected when
we are using the Menu Default, and this
| | 02:19 | is what it looks like in a brief
moment when it is activated. Notice this,
| | 02:24 | if we look to the right here we could see
some partial transparency because the
| | 02:27 | Opacity right here on the right-hand
side is set to this dropdown, and it's
| | 02:31 | about halfway transparent. So, kind of cool.
| | 02:33 | It allows you to see through the object,
which can make the subpictures appear
| | 02:37 | to be more interesting than they are.
| | 02:38 | There is a neat button here that
allows you to use the selected colors for
| | 02:41 | the activated colors.
| | 02:42 | So they're both the same.
| | 02:43 | You don't have to worry about that.
| | 02:45 | Now you'll notice that there are three
groups in each of the Highlight groups.
| | 02:49 | And this is where it gets kind of confusing.
| | 02:51 | You might remember earlier when we
looked at the Layers panel here, that there
| | 02:55 | was an =1 in parentheses.
| | 02:57 | Well the =1 tells Encore
which of the color schemes to use.
| | 03:04 | So if it says =1 it is going to use the
black here, and then the orange, and the red.
| | 03:09 | If we would have said =2, then it
would use the 2 track. Number 2,
| | 03:13 | it would use the Gray.
| | 03:14 | It would use the brighter yellow,
and the salmon color here, number 2.
| | 03:19 | Now, to add to the confusion, there is
actually two different Highlight groups.
| | 03:23 | So what if we wanted to use this really light
purple and blue for the colors for our buttons?
| | 03:29 | Well, what we could do is go back and
select the button, and then with the
| | 03:34 | button selected in the Properties panel,
we could change the Highlight Group
| | 03:38 | from Group 1 to Group 2.
| | 03:41 | So now we have the Normal State, the
Selected State, and the Activated State.
| | 03:47 | You could see that you could actually combine
different Highlight groups in the same menu.
| | 03:52 | So you could actually have multiple
colored Subpicture Highlights in the same
| | 03:56 | menu, which is kind of cool.
| | 03:57 | So again, I am going to click on the menu,
go back to Menu > Edit Menu Color Set here.
| | 04:02 | Again, this is a little bit of a brainteaser.
| | 04:05 | By default, most of the Highlights that
you'll find in the Library stuff of the
| | 04:10 | Encore created menus will use the =1 sign, so
| | 04:14 | you will be using this 1 track
here for the majority of your
| | 04:17 | Subpicture Highlights.
| | 04:18 | And if you want to change one of the
colors, just click in this field, and we
| | 04:21 | can choose by Hue, Saturation,
Brightness, or any one of these other color
| | 04:26 | schemes, to choose a new color if so
inclined, and we can also, again, change
| | 04:32 | the Opacity as well.
| | 04:34 | So again, that's how we change
the color of Subpicture Highlights.
| | 04:38 | It is very complicated for something
that seems like it should be very easy.
| | 04:42 | But again, the folks at Adobe I
think have done a pretty good job here.
| | 04:45 | It's really the fault of the DVD spec
that says that this is how colors kind
| | 04:49 | of need to go with Subpicture Highlights,
and have made things a little bit confusing.
| | 04:53 | So that is how to do it.
| | 04:55 | If it's a little overwhelming, then
you might want to continue with the
| | 04:57 | Training Series and come back here
if you need to change the color of
| | 05:00 | Subpicture Highlights.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Working with the TimelineUsing the Monitor| 00:00 | In this chapter, we are going to
look at Timelines, and one of the first
| | 00:03 | things you need to know about
Timelines is that we view the contents of
| | 00:06 | Timelines differently than we've
typically been looking at stuff in this
| | 00:10 | Training Series so far.
| | 00:11 | Most of the time we have been looking
at the Menu Viewer, but when we open up
| | 00:15 | Timelines, they open up in
something called the Monitor panel.
| | 00:19 | So we preview our Timelines, and this is what
we will be doing throughout this chapter here.
| | 00:24 | We preview our Timelines
through the Monitor panel.
| | 00:27 | The Monitor panel also has certain
features down here at the bottom that we will
| | 00:31 | look at, that are really
helpful just for working in Timelines.
| | 00:35 | We have the Action and Tile Safe areas,
and we have some chapter of Marker
| | 00:40 | Creators, and Navigators as well.
| | 00:43 | If you find that your Monitor panel
isn't showing, of course, we can go to the
| | 00:46 | Window menu and choose Monitor.
| | 00:48 | We could use the keyboard shortcut, or
we could simply just double-click the
| | 00:52 | Timeline that we would like to view.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating chapter markers| 00:00 | Next, we are going to look at
creating Chapter Markers, which is hugely
| | 00:03 | important when you're creating scenes
and submenus, so that people know exactly
| | 00:08 | where they need to go.
| | 00:10 | If they are watching your DVD, and they
hit the Next button, they will advance to
| | 00:14 | the next chapter marker.
| | 00:15 | So it's important that these
are placed at interesting spots.
| | 00:18 | Now for this Training Series we can't
really fit an entire 90-minute full-length
| | 00:23 | movie with the Exercise Files.
| | 00:25 | It's just too big, and you probably
wouldn't want to download that anyway.
| | 00:28 | So we have here a movie file with some
different scenes in it, and this is kind
| | 00:32 | of representative of a full-length movies,
of course, it's only 15 seconds long.
| | 00:36 | But this symbolically will
represent a full-length movie.
| | 00:40 | So we have here this train scene,
and then we cut to some guys on a bike.
| | 00:46 | So what I want to do is come down here
to my Timeline panel here, which is where
| | 00:52 | the Timeline exists.
| | 00:54 | And there actually already is a Chapter
Marker for you here at the first frame.
| | 00:58 | Encore does that automatically.
| | 01:00 | You can see part of it is sticking out here.
| | 01:01 | So I can move on, and I want to find
the first frame of the bikes, which is
| | 01:06 | right there at 3 seconds and 6 frames in.
| | 01:11 | Then to create a Chapter Marker, I
could simply click this button here in
| | 01:14 | the Timeline panel.
| | 01:15 | That creates a new Chapter, Chapter 2.
| | 01:17 | I could also click this
button here in the monitor.
| | 01:21 | I'm going to now move along until the next
cut, which will be right here on the beach.
| | 01:27 | Let's say this is the next scene,
at 6 seconds and 7 frames in.
| | 01:31 | And again, I could hit the Add
Chapter button at the bottom of the monitor.
| | 01:34 | Now I could navigate through these
chapters by clicking these buttons here at
| | 01:38 | the bottom of the monitor, go to the
Previous Chapter or the Next Chapter.
| | 01:42 | I am going to find one more scene, the next
cut here, which should be the guy talking.
| | 01:48 | There he is.
| | 01:49 | On this frame, I'm going to add another
Chapter Marker, but I am going to do it
| | 01:52 | in an easier way by using a keyboard shortcut.
| | 01:55 | That is the Asterisk key on the
numeric keypad on my computer.
| | 01:58 | Press that and the Chapter
Marker is, again, automatically added.
| | 02:03 | So now imagine it is a full-length movie.
People are watching this train for a
| | 02:07 | good long while, and if they're done
with it, they can press the Fast Forward
| | 02:10 | button, and skim it, or they could push
the Next button, and that will jump them
| | 02:14 | to this number 2 Chapter Marker.
| | 02:17 | Now, again, this is really helpful
because if I have a Submenu here, which
| | 02:21 | I'll go ahead and launch from the
General Set of the Library panel, Blue Notes
| | 02:24 | Submenu, we could actually drag
these Chapter Markers to different video
| | 02:30 | buttons.
| | 02:31 | So we are actually not showing different videos.
| | 02:35 | We are actually showing
different scenes of the same video.
| | 02:39 | Now, if you notice when I drag the
first Chapter Marker, which is the area
| | 02:44 | with the train, and I drag that first
Chapter Marker up to the Take 1 video
| | 02:49 | button here, you notice that it had a
different look for taking this frame
| | 02:54 | over here where this 1 is.
| | 02:55 | Now it's because the Poster Frame
for Frame 0, the starting frame, was not
| | 03:02 | appropriate, and so it used a
different frame called a Poster Frame.
| | 03:05 | So we'll talk about that in the next movie.
| | 03:07 | But be aware that Chapter Markers
are really an integral part of DVD
| | 03:11 | authoring because of this very feature,
so that people can get into the video
| | 03:15 | where they want.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting poster frames| 00:00 | In the last movie, we noticed that
when we took this first chapter marker and
| | 00:05 | dragged it to a Video button here,
that we got a different frame than where
| | 00:10 | the chapter marker was.
| | 00:11 | Let's go back to the Monitor here with
this timeline, and we'll notice that the
| | 00:15 | first chapter marker is here at the
first frame, which fades in from black.
| | 00:19 | But we are actually seeing, in this
Video button, a frame from over here, where
| | 00:24 | this little rectangle is here.
| | 00:26 | This little rectangle is what's
referred to as a poster frame.
| | 00:29 | You see, Encore looks at that first
frame that actually is black, and it fades
| | 00:33 | in, and it says you know what?
| | 00:35 | This is not going to work.
| | 00:36 | This is not a good representative
frame, because if we dragged this as is
| | 00:40 | here, then it would just be a solid
black, and that doesn't help anybody
| | 00:42 | figure anything out.
| | 00:43 | So what it does is it automatically
goes a few seconds down the road and places
| | 00:48 | a poster frame there.
| | 00:50 | And the poster frame says that this is
the frame that we'll represent visually
| | 00:55 | this chapter marker.
| | 00:56 | So each chapter marker can
have its own poster frame.
| | 01:00 | Now, in our case here, the poster frame is
not really indicative of this first chapter.
| | 01:05 | So what we can do is grab
this poster frame and move it.
| | 01:10 | Now, it represents more of what
this first chapter marker represents.
| | 01:14 | Let's look at another example here.
| | 01:16 | In the other timeline, we have B-roll_RideBy_04.
| | 01:19 | I'll go to the Monitor here.
| | 01:21 | We have some bike riders and when we
want people to be able to start watching
| | 01:27 | this, it's right about here at the beginning.
| | 01:29 | This is when things start up, and there is
actually a chapter marker for us here already.
| | 01:33 | So even though it doesn't from black,
we don't want this to be the poster
| | 01:36 | frame, because if this is the poster frame,
people can't really tell what's going on here.
| | 01:39 | So we want people to play this
when they click on this chapter.
| | 01:44 | However, we'd like to
have maybe this, or maybe back up a little bit.
| | 01:49 | Maybe this would be the poster frame.
| | 01:51 | So that way it
represents more what is happening.
| | 01:54 | So what I can do is click on this
chapter marker with my Current Time Indicator,
| | 02:00 | which is this yellow playhead with
the red vertical line underneath it.
| | 02:04 | I am going to have this at
five seconds and 22 frames in.
| | 02:08 | And with this first chapter marker
selected, I am going to right-click on it,
| | 02:12 | and choose Set Poster Frame.
| | 02:14 | And that will create a poster frame
where my Current TIme Indicator is.
| | 02:18 | Now, if I were to add this first
chapter marker to this Video button, it would
| | 02:23 | not be the frame without bicyclist,
but it would be the poster frame.
| | 02:26 | Now, let's go back to the Explore CA
ad Timeline here, and let's go to the
| | 02:31 | Monitor, and we'll move
in time here a little bit.
| | 02:34 | Let's go to this scene, and let's say
we'll add another chapter marker here by
| | 02:38 | clicking the Add Marker button or one
of the other various other ways we talked
| | 02:41 | about in the last movie.
| | 02:42 | Another way that I can create a poster
frame is simply by clicking on a chapter
| | 02:46 | marker and the using Command+Option on
the Mac or Ctrl+Alt on the PC, holding
| | 02:51 | those down while I drag away from that
current marker, and that creates a poster frame.
| | 02:58 | And you'll see that I am getting a
live update in the monitor of where
| | 03:02 | that poster frame is.
| | 03:03 | So once I find it could representative
frame, I could let go, and now, a poster
| | 03:07 | frame has been created.
| | 03:08 | So again, a poster frame is kind of
like a representative, an agent of the
| | 03:13 | chapter marker, if you will.
| | 03:14 | So even though the chapter will
actually begin playing here, or perhaps over
| | 03:20 | here, the video thumbnail
representation of the Video button will come from the
| | 03:25 | poster frame, not from where the
frame that actually will begin playing.
| | 03:29 | So again, they see this
frame here in the Video button.
| | 03:33 | But when it actually goes and plays, it
actually starts from the chapter marker.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating chapter points automatically| 00:00 | Sometimes when you are creating a
DVD for something that's not telling a
| | 00:03 | narrative story, something like maybe
a wedding or a sporting event, and you
| | 00:08 | basically just have a long period of time
there, and you want to create chapter markers,
| | 00:12 | there is a very quick and easy way to
have Encore automatically set chapter
| | 00:18 | markers at given intervals.
| | 00:19 | Now, in this clip here, we have a
bunch of really awesome doughnuts.
| | 00:24 | So we are going to pretend that this
is a movie that doesn't really have a
| | 00:28 | beginning, middle and an end.
| | 00:29 | It's just one long continuous shot of doughnuts.
| | 00:32 | So what we could do is select this
clip or this timeline and then go to the
| | 00:36 | Timeline menu at the top, and then we
are going to choose this, Add Chapter
| | 00:41 | Points at intervals.
| | 00:42 | And then, what I am going to
do is leave this for 8 seconds.
| | 00:46 | So every 8 seconds, this
would create an interval.
| | 00:48 | Now, you probably want to do this for
a little bit longer, if this were maybe
| | 00:52 | like an hour longer or two hours long.
| | 00:54 | Again, with the timecode here, this is
hours, minutes, seconds and frames.
| | 01:00 | So if you wanted to apply chapter points
every 45 minutes, then you might go in
| | 01:05 | here and change this to look like that.
| | 01:10 | That would be every 45 minutes, which
in a 90-minute movie would only create
| | 01:13 | one chapter marker.
| | 01:14 | That's probably a bad example.
| | 01:16 | Maybe every 15 minutes or so.
| | 01:18 | But what I am going to do here is
change this back to 0, and because this
| | 01:20 | footage is so short, I am
just going to say 8 seconds.
| | 01:24 | And then, if you wanted to, you could
actually remove existing chapter points as
| | 01:28 | well, so that you are adding
in intervals are the only ones.
| | 01:31 | I am just going to go ahead and leave
it as this at 8 seconds and click OK.
| | 01:35 | In just a couple of seconds there, we
have an entire timeline full of organized
| | 01:40 | chapter markers at given
intervals that we did not have to add.
| | 01:44 | Encore did them automatically for us.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing video in the timeline| 00:00 | Encore allows you do some light video editing.
| | 00:03 | Now, Encore is definitely not built for this.
| | 00:06 | So it's not recommended that you do a
majority of your video editing here.
| | 00:09 | But in pinch, it's good to know that
there are a few little helpers here
| | 00:14 | allowing you to do some light video editing.
| | 00:16 | In my Timeline here, I have this
flower clip, and as we play it, we realize
| | 00:20 | that the camera guys kind of like pulling
focus and just kind of getting it all set up and stuff.
| | 00:24 | This is not the stuff that
our viewers will need to see.
| | 00:27 | It's really right about there, at about
13 seconds and 20 frames in, and this is
| | 00:32 | where we want the clip to start.
| | 00:33 | So all this junk right here, the first
part of the clip is not anything that I need.
| | 00:37 | So I am going to put my cursor over
the beginning here and just like in Adobe
| | 00:41 | Premiere Pro, we get this Trimming icon
that we could click and drag this to our
| | 00:47 | Current TIme Indicator, thereby
chopping off those initial bits.
| | 00:52 | Now, this does leave a hole here.
| | 00:54 | So what we will need to do is click
and drag and put this back in its place.
| | 01:01 | Now remember that Encore does not have
the power to change your source material.
| | 01:05 | So we are not really changing the
footage here or deleting the footage here.
| | 01:09 | So I could go back at any time and move this
back, and then re-stretch it out if I wanted to.
| | 01:14 | I am just going to undo that, because I
actually kind of liked it trimmed there.
| | 01:18 | I could do the same
thing to the end of the clip.
| | 01:20 | At the end of the clip here, we see
that there is a refrigerator door or
| | 01:24 | something like that that
closes or whatever. We don't that.
| | 01:27 | So right about there is the end
of the usable portion of the clip.
| | 01:31 | So I can grab the end of the clip and drag
it to where the Current TIme Indicator is.
| | 01:35 | And I am basically just using the
Current TIme Indicator as a reference.
| | 01:38 | You don't need to, but I find that it helps.
| | 01:41 | Now again, it's not time or the place
for video editing, only it's kind of a
| | 01:45 | last ditch emergency thing.
| | 01:46 | But if you did need to use it as an emergency,
you could double-click on the Project panel.
| | 01:51 | I am going to import
another piece of footage here.
| | 01:53 | It doesn't really matter what it is.
| | 01:55 | Let's just go with this RideBy clip.
| | 01:57 | Bring this in and drag this down.
| | 02:00 | And so, I am actually adding
this clip to the Timeline as well.
| | 02:03 | It automatically adds a chapter
marker for me, which is pretty cool.
| | 02:06 | Basically, now, I have two clips
that I have added to the same Timeline.
| | 02:09 | So if you are doing like a Greatest
Hits Reel or something like that, you can
| | 02:14 | drag all those clips here into the
same timeline in Encore, again, do light
| | 02:19 | video editing on these clips.
| | 02:20 | I could trim this here a
little bit and move it around.
| | 02:23 | So again, Encore is not going to win you
the Academy Award as Best Video Editor,
| | 02:27 | but in a pinch, if you need to assemble
clips, trim off the beginning and end,
| | 02:32 | move them around, Encore does
give you the ability to do that.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Timeline Viewer vs. the Timeline panel| 00:00 | Similar to what we saw with the Menu
Viewer and the Menu panel, there is also a
| | 00:05 | Timeline Viewer and the Timeline panel.
| | 00:07 | Just so that we are clear, I wanted to
explain those briefly to you. What we are
| | 00:10 | looking at here when we are playing
around with our content, editing footage,
| | 00:13 | editing chapter markers, et cetera, et cetera.
| | 00:15 | This here is the Timeline Viewer.
| | 00:18 | That's what we are looking at here.
| | 00:20 | If you have multiple timelines, you
can choose those from this dropdown here,
| | 00:24 | as well as, if you had multiple menus,
you could choose them from the Menu
| | 00:27 | Viewer dropdown here.
| | 00:29 | And then you also notice, just like
with menus, we have a Timelines panel.
| | 00:33 | And the Timelines panel, again ,just
like the menus panel over here, it allows
| | 00:37 | you to see all the timelines
in your product at a glance.
| | 00:40 | And if you click on one of those
timelines and select it, you'll see all of the
| | 00:43 | chapter markers below.
| | 00:45 | And just like with the Menus panel,
when we select a menu and we see all of the
| | 00:50 | buttons here and how they are linked,
| | 00:51 | when we select a timeline in the
Timelines panel, the second half, the lower
| | 00:56 | hemisphere, if you will, of this panel
shows you all of the chapter markers.
| | 01:01 | It shows you which timeline they are
associated with, and also shows you In
| | 01:05 | points where the Poster Frame is and if
there's Links and all that kind of stuff as well.
| | 01:10 | So if you hear me refer to the Timelines
panel or the Timeline Viewer, don't get confused.
| | 01:16 | Again, just like with menus, there
is a viewer and a panel, and they
| | 01:20 | do different things.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Creating Links and NavigationCreating navigation with the Flowchart| 00:00 | So far, in this training series,
we've been creating links by using the
| | 00:03 | Properties panel, and that's an
absolutely acceptable way to do it.
| | 00:06 | But there is another way to create
navigation, and that's with something
| | 00:10 | called the Flowchart.
| | 00:11 | The Flowchart is typically found in the center-
top of the interface next to the Menu Viewer.
| | 00:15 | If you are not seeing it, again you
could go to Window > Flowchart here.
| | 00:19 | This is just a logical,
visual way to lay out your DVD.
| | 00:23 | Even if you use the Properties panel,
I might recommend still checking out
| | 00:26 | the flowchart just to see how your project
is doing, see the visual flow of information.
| | 00:31 | And also, Encore objects down here at
the bottom of the flowchart, they are not
| | 00:35 | connected to anything.
| | 00:36 | This is referred to as the orphanage,
and these are orphan Encore objects,
| | 00:41 | because they are not linked
to anything in the project.
| | 00:44 | So we have our disc here.
| | 00:45 | And the very first thing that users are
going to see in this project is this menu here.
| | 00:51 | That's because this menu is set as
the first play object, which we'll talk
| | 00:55 | about in the next movie.
| | 00:56 | Now, this menu, if we go back to
the menu here, has three buttons:
| | 00:59 | Play All, Scenes, Setup.
| | 01:01 | Now, in the flowchart, we
see these three buttons:
| | 01:04 | Play All, Scenes and Setup.
| | 01:06 | If we want to create a link, all we
have to do is click and drag from Play All,
| | 01:11 | and then we get pick whip here, just
like we did from the Properties panel here.
| | 01:14 | I am going to drag this to the Clip05-tahoe
timeline, and that link has been created now.
| | 01:20 | So now that button links to the timeline.
| | 01:23 | That's really all we had to do.
| | 01:25 | Now, if you want to link the Scenes
button, we can simply click here on Scenes.
| | 01:28 | Click and drag to the Explore CA ad,
for example, and let's go ahead and click
| | 01:32 | on Setup and link to this slide show
here, which is actually empty slide show,
| | 01:36 | but we are just using it to
talk about the flowchart here.
| | 01:39 | Now, as we discussed at the beginning
of this training series, one of the key
| | 01:43 | ingredients to a successful
Encore project is End Actions.
| | 01:47 | So we want to make sure that all of
our Encore elements have End Actions.
| | 01:52 | So at the end of this timeline, what happens?
| | 01:54 | So I am going to click at the end of
this timeline, on the right-hand side, and
| | 01:57 | I am going to drag back to this Explore CA menu.
| | 02:01 | Now, we've created an End Action that way.
| | 02:03 | Do the same thing for this timeline as well.
| | 02:07 | Now, the End Action could
be something else entirely.
| | 02:10 | It could go to, for example, a
different menu, and that's perfectly acceptable.
| | 02:14 | You could go to a different clip.
| | 02:15 | You could really do anything you want here.
| | 02:17 | As you could see in the flowchart,
how wonderful it is to have a visual
| | 02:20 | representation of the flow that our
users will be following as they travel the
| | 02:25 | different courses that you lay out for
them through the navigation of your menus
| | 02:29 | in your DVD project.
| | 02:31 | If things starting to get a little
bit too big for you, you could also use
| | 02:33 | this navigation slider here to zoom
out a little bit and see more of your
| | 02:37 | project at a glance, if your project
starts getting a little bit too big.
| | 02:40 | So that's just an introductory look
at the flowchart and the power therein.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting a "first play" object| 00:00 | As we saw in our flowchart, that first
arrow coming out of this dick icon in the
| | 00:04 | flowchart represents the first play
object, the first thing that will happen
| | 00:09 | when our disk is played in a DVD player.
| | 00:12 | And you could tell that this Explore
CA menu is the first played object here in
| | 00:16 | the Project panel, because it's
denoted by this little icon here.
| | 00:18 | It's a circle with an arrow.
| | 00:20 | So in another words, this is
the first thing that will happen.
| | 00:23 | Well, a lot of times when you are
watching a DVD, you actually might want to
| | 00:26 | play a timeline first.
| | 00:27 | And a lot of times when you are
watching Hollywood DVDs, it doesn't
| | 00:29 | actually start with a menu.
| | 00:30 | It starts with a little movie,
maybe an FBI warning, or whatever it is.
| | 00:34 | And so, you might want to put that
timeline first and have the timeline's End
| | 00:38 | Action go automatically to the menu.
| | 00:41 | So the way that we create a
first play object is quite simple.
| | 00:43 | We simply right-click an
object and choose Set as First Play.
| | 00:48 | And then, now this object has the
circle with the arrow in it, and it becomes
| | 00:53 | the first thing coming out of the disk.
| | 00:55 | I should also point out that just like
with End Actions, if you do not have a
| | 00:59 | first play object setup, then Encore
will give you a warning when you go to
| | 01:03 | check for errors, and you burn a
disc or make a Web site or whatever.
| | 01:07 | It will let you know that this is a problem.
| | 01:09 | You absolutely need to have a first play object.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Auto-selecting button names from links| 00:00 | When we are creating linkage, or
navigation, from the Properties panel or the
| | 00:04 | Flowchart, we want to be
aware of the name of the clip.
| | 00:09 | Let's say I want to link up this Footage
button to this Timeline here in Clip05-tahoe.
| | 00:13 | I would want to, probably in this case,
leave the name of the button Footage.
| | 00:17 | I probably wouldn't want to
change this to Clip05-tahoe.
| | 00:20 | However, you might bring in footage
that you want the clip name here to change
| | 00:26 | the name of the button.
| | 00:27 | By default, now, when I click on this
button and I create the link and I link up
| | 00:32 | to the Timeline here,
| | 00:33 | it says the name of the link right here,
and it doesn't change the name of the
| | 00:37 | button, which you could actually find
right here with the button selected in
| | 00:40 | the Properties panel.
| | 00:41 | However, this way it used to be, the
default is this Set Name from Link Button
| | 00:46 | used to be selected.
| | 00:48 | When that happens, and I'll just
undo this, so I can start over again,
| | 00:50 | I'll click Set Name for Link,
| | 00:52 | when that happens and we link to
something, then the name of the button
| | 00:57 | changes based on the name of the timeline.
| | 01:00 | So just be aware of that.
| | 01:02 | Most of the time you might not want that.
| | 01:03 | But sometimes that could be a timesaver for you.
| | 01:06 | And if you aren't aware that this is
there, and you get on somebody else's
| | 01:09 | machine, or this is automatically set that
way, so this Set Name from Link is checked,
| | 01:13 | that could drive you nuts.
| | 01:15 | So just be aware of this option
if you want it or do not want it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating user permissions for a disc| 00:00 | Another thing that will really affect
navigation, and also the user's whole
| | 00:04 | experience, is how you set permissions.
| | 00:07 | You see you can allow users to do
stuff or not do stuff based on Permissions.
| | 00:12 | So I am going to go ahead and click on
this timeline in the Timeline panel so I
| | 00:15 | could adjust its
properties in the Properties panel.
| | 00:18 | Now, you'll see this frequently,
Operations: All permitted.
| | 00:21 | So this is where you can set
permissions for this particular timeline.
| | 00:26 | So I click on Set, and by
default, everything is permitted.
| | 00:30 | You might want to allow them to do
nothing, but more than likely, you'll
| | 00:34 | probably want to customize a timeline
user operation, especially if they're
| | 00:37 | something like an FBI warning or something
like that and you need them, by law, to
| | 00:42 | see that, or maybe it's like
required by your company that they see some
| | 00:45 | disclaimer or something.
| | 00:47 | Just to make sure that they can't rewind
or fast forward by leaving this unchecked.
| | 00:51 | But you want to be able to
probably have them stop something or pause
| | 00:55 | something in most cases.
| | 00:56 | So set to All, unless I have a very
distinct reason for choosing Custom.
| | 01:01 | A lot of times on a DVD remote, they
will have an Audio button and a Subtitle
| | 01:05 | button, which allows them to change
the audio tracks and the subtitle tracks
| | 01:08 | without having to go back to the menu and
choose those things, which is really convenient.
| | 01:13 | So if you uncheck these,
they won't be able to do that.
| | 01:15 | Again, sometimes you'll have
things that you'll want your viewers,
| | 01:19 | you'll force them to watch, as it were.
| | 01:21 | But this tends to drive users crazy.
| | 01:23 | I know that when I am watching a DVD,
and they kind of force me to watch previews,
| | 01:27 | and I can't skip pass them,
| | 01:28 | it drives me bonkers.
| | 01:29 | Generally, people like to have the
power to adjust things if possible.
| | 01:33 | But if you need to change
things, that's where they are.
| | 01:36 | Now, you also have the opportunity to change
user permissions for menus and the disc as well.
| | 01:42 | So if I click on a menu, for example,
I go over here to the Properties panel
| | 01:46 | with the menu selected, and
I could click on Operations:
| | 01:48 | All Permitted, and I could choose some
options here, not too much in the way of power here.
| | 01:53 | The real control is over
the Timeline Permission.
| | 01:56 | That's really where it's very important.
| | 01:58 | But you can change some permissions here.
| | 02:00 | If I click a blank area in the project,
so essentially nothing is selected in
| | 02:04 | the Project panel, then, when I go over
to the Properties panel, I am actually
| | 02:07 | controlling the properties
of the entire disc itself.
| | 02:10 | So with the disc selected, I can go and set
some user permissions for the entire disc.
| | 02:16 | So that's how you set permissions for
the disc, for menus and for Timelines.
| | 02:21 | Be aware that you need to do
this for each timeline individually.
| | 02:24 | You may not want to allow users to
skip and fastforward through the FBI
| | 02:28 | warning before your movie.
| | 02:30 | But you may want them to be able to
fastforward through the actual video
| | 02:33 | that they're watching.
| | 02:34 | Just be aware that changing user permissions
will drastically change the user's experience.
| | 02:41 | And sometimes you need to do that, for
your own sake, the sake of your company
| | 02:45 | and whoever your client is, but as much
as possible, you want to give the user
| | 02:50 | as much control as you can.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Object BasicsCreating and adjusting text| 00:00 | We've seen before how you can add text
to any menu, or project, or whatever you are
| | 00:04 | doing, from the Library panel by going to
the text area here, looking at the text items,
| | 00:09 | and you could choose a font size or an
actual font or a style and just drag and
| | 00:14 | drop that into your project.
| | 00:16 | But now I want to show you how to
create text from scratch, and also how to
| | 00:19 | tweak that text manually.
| | 00:21 | What we are going to do is go to the
toolbar here, and we are going to choose
| | 00:24 | this tool, which is the Text tool. Click
that, and I am just going to click here
| | 00:28 | at the top of my menu.
| | 00:30 | Actually this menu is just a
background for the time being, so I am going to
| | 00:33 | type My Movie Project.
| | 00:37 | Now, what I am going to do, instead of
clicking the Selection tool to select
| | 00:40 | this, I am going to change this.
| | 00:42 | I definitely don't like a lot about it actually.
| | 00:44 | I am going to click and highlight it.
| | 00:46 | Then I am going to go over to the
right side of my interface here, and I am
| | 00:49 | going to choose the Character panel.
| | 00:50 | The Character panel has all
that you need to tweak your text.
| | 00:54 | First thing I want to do is change
this really clashing green color by
| | 00:57 | clicking in this Color Swatch, and
I'm actually going to click the radio
| | 01:01 | button next to H, which gives me a
different color scheme, a way to choose
| | 01:05 | color, that I prefer much more.
| | 01:07 | So I am going to go down to the red-
green area in this Hue bar here, this
| | 01:13 | vertical bar, until I'm kind of in the
ballpark of what's going on here in menu background.
| | 01:18 | Let's make a text that's a little
bit darker than that by going to the
| | 01:21 | right-hand side here.
| | 01:22 | That looks pretty good, so I
will go ahead and click OK.
| | 01:25 | Now, it's a little bit harder to see.
| | 01:27 | But if we are going to click this
Selection tool and click away, we could see
| | 01:30 | that the text color now blends in
with this background much better.
| | 01:34 | Now, I am going to go back to the
Type tool and again, once our brackets go
| | 01:38 | away around the edge of our
cursor with the Type tool, then we can click
| | 01:42 | next to existing text to create it.
| | 01:45 | And I think I accidentally did that wrong.
| | 01:46 | I am going press the Escape key here
and try that one more time. There we go!
| | 01:49 | Click and drag to select my text.
| | 01:52 | Now, you could fiddle with it.
| | 01:53 | You could change the font
from the top dropdown here.
| | 01:56 | Right now, the font that I
am using is Arial Narrow.
| | 01:59 | I kind of don't like that.
| | 02:00 | Oftentimes, I've noticed when you
have very thin, very wispy fonts,
| | 02:04 | they don't end up looking that
great when you burn things to DVD.
| | 02:08 | There is a lot of variables at play as
far as output onto a TV screen and whatnot.
| | 02:13 | I find usually that thicker fonts,
like Arial Black, work better.
| | 02:17 | If you want to use a thinner font, like
Arial Narrow, what you can do is click
| | 02:23 | on this Style button.
| | 02:24 | That's Faux Bold on the bottom left.
| | 02:26 | These are all different
styles you could use for your text.
| | 02:29 | Some of them aren't that helpful, like
Strike Through, but it's still here.
| | 02:33 | So I am going to click on this button
here on the left, which is Faux Bold and it
| | 02:36 | just kind of thickens
these things up a little bit.
| | 02:38 | If we have a paragraph of text to add, we
could change the justification here, we
| | 02:41 | have Align Left, Align Center and
Align Right or Justify Alignment.
| | 02:46 | I am just going to leave
this set to Left Align for now.
| | 02:49 | We can also change the style of
our font: Regular, Italic, Bold, Bold
| | 02:52 | Italic, and that's only for fonts where you
have those other options loaded on your system.
| | 02:57 | From this dropdown, we could
change the size of our text.
| | 02:59 | I like to keep things big and thick.
| | 03:02 | If we go down too small, that's going to
get broken up by the lines on our TV screen.
| | 03:06 | So it's good to keep
things substantial, if we can.
| | 03:09 | It's here in your Character panel where
you will also get access to basic text
| | 03:13 | editing properties that you would find
in Photoshop, Illustrator, as well as
| | 03:17 | Premiere or After Effects.
| | 03:18 | For example, we have Leading,
which is just the space between lines.
| | 03:22 | So if we had multiple lines of text in
the same text bracket, this would adjust
| | 03:25 | the space between them.
| | 03:26 | We could just the Tracking, which is the
space between all the letters on a line of text.
| | 03:32 | We could also adjust the Kerning, which
is the spaces between just two letters.
| | 03:36 | Also adjust the Vertical
Height and Horizontal Width here.
| | 03:40 | Typically, you want to keep these
both at 100%, so that your text is
| | 03:44 | proportionately scaled.
| | 03:45 | But there might be times when you want
to squash the text or stretch it out.
| | 03:49 | Once you have the text the way you want it,
go ahead and click on the Selection tool.
| | 03:52 | That's the black arrow on the upper
left-hand corner of the Tools panel, and
| | 03:56 | that will accept our text, and now
we can click away from the text to
| | 03:59 | deselect it as well.
| | 04:02 | So that's how we create and edit text.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Applying styles| 00:00 | If you are feeling like the text that
you've created is just a little bit too
| | 00:03 | bland and boring, you could apply
styles to it, and give it some extra pizzazz.
| | 00:07 | What you can do is go over to the
Styles panel, typically grouped with the
| | 00:10 | Library panel in that frame.
| | 00:12 | Click on Styles, and we have a group,
or a series of sets here actually of
| | 00:17 | different categories.
| | 00:18 | So we'll start here with Basics, and as
you could see, right now we have image
| | 00:22 | styles, text styles and shape styles
and by default, they are all selected.
| | 00:26 | If you want to choose one, just like
with the Library panel, we could click on
| | 00:29 | text to see just text styles.
| | 00:31 | And I could see all of them again by
clicking with the Option key held down on
| | 00:35 | the Mac or the Alt key on the PC.
| | 00:37 | Now to be honest with you, all of
these styles work on everything.
| | 00:40 | So the little T denotes a text style,
the picture here represents an image
| | 00:45 | style, and then the little pen
represents styles for shapes.
| | 00:49 | But I can click and drag on this
style for shapes and apply it to my text.
| | 00:54 | As you could see here, +Drop
Shadow means add a drop shadow.
| | 00:58 | The Plus icon means that I'm just going
to add the style to whatever is there.
| | 01:02 | So if I add +Emboss Smooth Down here,
then it's going to add this embossing to
| | 01:08 | our text, and it's going
to leave the Drop Shadow.
| | 01:11 | So that's what the Plus means.
| | 01:12 | It's not going to
completely replace what's there.
| | 01:14 | It means it's going to add to it.
| | 01:15 | Now one of the image styles is Clear
All Styles, so I could actually just drag
| | 01:21 | and drop that on to my text
and get rid of all the styles.
| | 01:24 | Now as I mentioned, there
are tons of categories here.
| | 01:26 | There's Colors and Gradients.
| | 01:28 | There is Glass Styles.
| | 01:29 | So if we want to add some
magenta glass to this, we can do that.
| | 01:33 | We can also undo by hitting Command+
Z on the Mac and Ctrl+Z on the PC.
| | 01:38 | Now as indicated, these styles are not just
for Text but for Shapes and Images as well.
| | 01:42 | So we can go to the Library panel
here, and we could go over to shapes by
| | 01:46 | clicking the Pen icon, and then we
could go and choose a shape, let's say
| | 01:52 | this Brush stroke here.
| | 01:53 | Drag and drop this into our project.
| | 01:55 | Just want to do some decoration.
| | 01:56 | Then we could go over to the Styles
panel and take one of these styles,
| | 02:01 | I'm just going to use Magenta Glass
Down, and just drag and drop it onto
| | 02:04 | our Brush stroke there.
| | 02:05 | Likewise, we can go back to the basics,
and we can apply maybe a Drop Shadow.
| | 02:11 | Just drag and drop a Drop Shadow if we want to.
| | 02:13 | So again, just like the Library, the
Styles area, it is another place that
| | 02:18 | Encore really excels because it
comes with tons and tons of free content.
| | 02:22 | You don't have to worry about doing it manually.
| | 02:24 | You could just drag and
drop a style, and there you go!
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Automatically arranging objects| 00:00 | A lot of times when you're
designing in Encore things can get messy,
| | 00:04 | typically not this messy.
| | 00:05 | This is an exaggerated example.
| | 00:06 | But I have four buttons here that I have
dragged and dropped into this menu, and
| | 00:10 | they are all over the place.
| | 00:11 | And I could eyeball it and move
these closer together and align them, but
| | 00:16 | that's just a big mess.
| | 00:17 | It's not something I want to do.
| | 00:18 | So what I'm going to do is select all of these.
| | 00:20 | I'm going to click on one of them with
the Selection tool, and I'm going to hold
| | 00:23 | the Shift key down and click on the
others so that they are all selected.
| | 00:27 | Then I could go to the Object menu,
and the first thing I'm going to do is
| | 00:30 | I'm going to align these.
| | 00:31 | So I'm going to go to Align, and then
I'm going to choose Right, so that the
| | 00:36 | right edges are aligned.
| | 00:38 | And instantly this looks so much better, and
at least horizontally, they are all lined up.
| | 00:43 | But now I want to not line them up,
but I want to distribute them evenly.
| | 00:48 | So what I could do is go to Object, and
this time I'm going to go down to Distribute.
| | 00:52 | And I'm going to distribute them vertically.
| | 00:55 | So then now, they are equally spaced.
| | 00:58 | So what was once chaos is now very
orderly, the right edges are aligned and
| | 01:04 | vertically they are equally distributed.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Transforming objects| 00:00 | Throughout this training series, we've
talked a little bit about transforming
| | 00:02 | objects, but I want to go a
little bit more into detail here.
| | 00:05 | We're going to be transforming
this little arabesque ribbon here.
| | 00:09 | So I'm going to select the Direct
Select tool and click on the little graphic
| | 00:13 | here, as we can play with it.
| | 00:14 | We know that once we click on an object,
we get a bounding box that allows us to
| | 00:17 | do most transformations, at
least most common transformations.
| | 00:21 | And we can resize it horizontally by
clicking one of the dots on either side
| | 00:25 | here, or the anchor points we'll call them.
| | 00:28 | I'm just going to undo that.
| | 00:29 | We could resize this vertically by
clicking on one of the center points on the
| | 00:33 | top line or on the bottom line.
| | 00:36 | I'm just going to undo that again, by
hitting Command+Z or Ctrl+Z a couple of times.
| | 00:40 | If we click on the corner point, we
can resize this, both vertically and
| | 00:45 | horizontally if we choose to.
| | 00:47 | Adding the Shift key will make sure
that our proportions are constrained.
| | 00:52 | We don't want to take this, if it's an
image, we don't want to go above 100%.
| | 00:55 | So whatever the original size was, we
don't want to go bigger than that, because
| | 00:59 | then it starts looking pixelated
and fuzzy, so that's not a good idea.
| | 01:03 | But we can use Shift to make this
proportionately smaller or larger.
| | 01:07 | Now if I add Option to the mix, or
actually I don't have to hold down Shift for
| | 01:11 | this, but if I hold down the Option
key on the Mac or the Alt key on the PC,
| | 01:15 | then I scale from the center.
| | 01:18 | If I just scale, by default, I'm
scaling from typically the opposite corner.
| | 01:22 | So I'm scaling from the lower left-hand
corner with this particular graphic and
| | 01:27 | again, Option or Alt makes it so
that it scales from the center.
| | 01:31 | So if I hold the Shift key and the
Option key, or the Shift key and the Alt
| | 01:35 | key on the PC, then I'm going to
scale it from the center, and I'm going to
| | 01:39 | scale proportionately.
| | 01:41 | Now, if you're playing around with
your object and you get something really
| | 01:44 | screwy like this, let me just
stretch this really out of proportion here,
| | 01:47 | in other Adobe programs, you could
press the Escape key, and it will cancel the
| | 01:50 | transformation, and I'm
not able to do that here.
| | 01:53 | So I hit Command+Z or Ctrl+Z to undo that.
| | 01:56 | With an object selected, you could also
go up to the Object menu, and there are
| | 01:59 | several ways to transform an object here.
| | 02:02 | If I want to rotate something 180
degrees or 90 degrees clockwise or
| | 02:06 | counterclockwise, I could do this here
without having to guess while I'm rotating.
| | 02:11 | I could also arrange this.
| | 02:12 | If there are layers of objects, I can
change their arrangement by bringing other
| | 02:16 | objects forward or backwards.
| | 02:18 | I could also flip this horizontally, and
I could also flip it vertically as well
| | 02:24 | from the Object menu.
| | 02:26 | And so you will probably notice that
most of the tutorials from this chapter
| | 02:29 | have come from this great Object menu,
which allows us to Align, Distribute
| | 02:34 | objects as well as Arrange
and Rotate them and Flip them.
| | 02:37 | And there is also a special Drop Shadow
option here. If you wanted to add a Drop
| | 02:42 | Shadow here from the Styles panel,
| | 02:44 | there's not really any control over it
and because Drop Shadows are so common,
| | 02:48 | it's often advisable to go to the
Object menu and apply a Drop Shadow that way.
| | 02:52 | So that way you could manually control
different parameters, such as the Opacity
| | 02:57 | of the Drop Shadow and the Angle and
also the Distance from the object, which is
| | 03:03 | an important one for text.
| | 03:04 | Sometimes you just want it a little
bit like that, and it works perfect.
| | 03:08 | But you might want something appearing
to fly off the page and a lot of distance
| | 03:12 | helps with that illusion.
| | 03:13 | But if you wanted to add a Drop Shadow
that way and have manual control over all
| | 03:17 | the properties of a Drop Shadow,
this is one way to do it as well.
| | 03:20 | So again, if you're going to transform
an object, if you have something, and
| | 03:24 | you go to the Library panel, drag an
image, or a shape, or something like that,
| | 03:28 | oftentimes the Object menu can help
you shape it and mold it to get it where
| | 03:32 | you want it to be.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Creating SlideshowsIntroducing slideshows| 00:00 | Perhaps my favorite
Encore feature is Slideshows.
| | 00:03 | We're going to take a look at that
throughout this chapter, and also I should
| | 00:06 | point that later on in this training
series, we're going to have a chapter on
| | 00:09 | using Encore as a presentation tool.
| | 00:11 | And so if slideshows interest you, I
am going to save some advanced Slideshow
| | 00:14 | concepts for that chapter, and I
invite you to check that out as well.
| | 00:17 | So first step here, go to the Project
panel, double-click in a blank area here
| | 00:21 | to Import as Assets.
| | 00:23 | And I'm here in this Stills folder, in
the Media folder, in the Exercise Files
| | 00:27 | folder, and we're going to click on
the first file, 3835_beach_yoga, and scroll
| | 00:32 | down to the bottom file and hold Shift
and click marina_west, so all of these
| | 00:37 | will be imported as assets.
| | 00:39 | Go ahead and click Open then. All right.
| | 00:41 | So, after a minute, these images have
been imported, and the first thing I
| | 00:46 | like to do, although it's not necessary to
create Slideshows, is I like to organize this
| | 00:50 | because as you start bringing in slides
to create Slideshows, that's when your
| | 00:54 | project becomes extra-extra messy.
| | 00:56 | So what I'm going to do is go down to the
bottom of the Project panel and choose New Folder.
| | 01:00 | I'll call this Stills.
| | 01:03 | And then I'm going to click the top
image again and Shift+Click the bottom image
| | 01:08 | and drag these stills to that folder
so that at anytime I could then click this
| | 01:12 | little arrow here and close up this
folder when I'm done with these images.
| | 01:16 | Now, the first thing I'm going to do
to actually create the Slideshow is go
| | 01:19 | down under the Project panel again, at
the bottom here, and I'm not going to
| | 01:22 | choose Folder this time.
| | 01:23 | I'm going to choose Slideshow.
| | 01:24 | So I'm going to have Encore
create for me a new slideshow.
| | 01:28 | We've talked before about how there are
a menu viewer and about how there are
| | 01:32 | Timeline viewers and when you create a
new slideshow you work with a Slideshow
| | 01:36 | in the Slideshow viewer,
so that's where we are here.
| | 01:39 | So to add slides to our Slideshow, we
open up the folder and select the images
| | 01:45 | that you want, I'm just
going to select all of these.
| | 01:47 | I'm going to click one here again, and
then Shift+Click the last one, and I'm
| | 01:51 | going to drag these down into the Slideshow
viewer where they are assembled as slides.
| | 01:57 | Now we also get some timecodes that
tells us how long our slideshow is and also
| | 02:01 | at which point that
particular slide enters the slideshow.
| | 02:05 | So this first one starts at the
beginning, and then this one comes in at 6
| | 02:08 | seconds in, 12 seconds, 18
seconds, 24 seconds and so forth.
| | 02:12 | Now we talked before also about how we
use the Monitor panel to view timelines,
| | 02:17 | but we also use the Monitor
panel to view Slideshows as well.
| | 02:21 | So, I can come down her, and I can
click the Play button, and we get the time-
| | 02:24 | code for our slideshow and when this
gets to 24 seconds, this is going to jump
| | 02:29 | to the next line, as seen, and I can
click Pause to stop the Slideshow playback.
| | 02:34 | I realize for the time being that it
is quite boring to sit there and look at
| | 02:38 | one image for 6 seconds and
then just jump to the next image.
| | 02:43 | So, we'll be polishing this up a
lot as we go throughout this chapter.
| | 02:46 | Now, I'm going to go to a blank area
actually here, and I'm going to click in
| | 02:51 | there to deselect all of the slides.
| | 02:52 | And what I can do now is move
these slides around to rearrange them.
| | 02:56 | This is going to be an Explore
California slideshow, so I might start with this
| | 03:00 | romantic shot of this couple on the beach.
| | 03:03 | The colors are really beautiful, so I
can click and drag this to the left, and
| | 03:07 | this little black bar indicates
where the slide is going to go now.
| | 03:10 | Drag this all the way to the left, and that
now becomes the very first slide in my slideshow.
| | 03:14 | So I can click and drag and move and
rearrange these to my heart's content.
| | 03:18 | Now it's important to know that even
though we have this entire folder of
| | 03:21 | Stills, I'm just going
to close this folder here,
| | 03:23 | you'll see that we have this Slideshow
object now, and this is what we would to link to.
| | 03:27 | Let's say if we had a menu, we get the
button selected, and we've got the Pick Whip,
| | 03:31 | we want to link the button
to this Slideshow object.
| | 03:35 | I want to add some pizzazz to this
slideshow, so I'm going to double-click in
| | 03:38 | the Project panel again.
| | 03:40 | I'm going to go to the Media
folder in the Exercise Files folder.
| | 03:42 | This time I'm going to go to the Audio
folder, then click on this audio track,
| | 03:46 | Explore California Intro W perc & bass.
Click Open and then drag and drop this
| | 03:51 | audio track into this
repository here, this little depot.
| | 03:56 | And this is where we can
add audio to our Slideshow.
| | 04:00 | Now I'm going to click on the first slide
and then click Play in the Monitor panel.
| | 04:03 | (Music playing.)
| | 04:11 | So slides are on way too long, but we've got
the audio going for us, which is pretty cool.
| | 04:16 | Now, of course, there's a lot of
polishing we need to do and again, we're going
| | 04:19 | to look at that in the rest
of the movies in this chapter.
| | 04:21 | One other important note about
slideshows and the limitations there, you could
| | 04:26 | only have 99 images per Slideshow.
| | 04:30 | So, what you have to do is
make multiple slideshows.
| | 04:33 | So you could make the end action of one
slideshow another slideshow, so it goes
| | 04:37 | from slideshow to slideshow to slideshow.
| | 04:40 | And in that way you kind of get around
this thing that only allows you have 99
| | 04:43 | images per slideshow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adjusting slideshow properties| 00:00 | Now as I mentioned, the real power in
Encore Slideshows are in the fiddling with
| | 00:05 | them, the adjusting the
properties and options and stuff.
| | 00:07 | This can be a little confusing
because there are several ways to do this.
| | 00:10 | In the Slideshow Viewer, for example,
there is a Slideshow Options area.
| | 00:15 | So there are several options
we can choose to adjust here.
| | 00:18 | Now, of course, we could also adjust
things using the Properties panel, and this
| | 00:22 | works in basically two ways.
| | 00:23 | If we click on let's say, the Slideshow,
for example, in the Project panel, then
| | 00:28 | we could adjust the properties of the
slideshow, and you could see that there
| | 00:32 | are tons of options here.
| | 00:33 | Notice there is actually even
multiple tabs for different options.
| | 00:37 | Now we could also adjust individual stills.
| | 00:40 | So if I click on a slide, for example,
here in the Slideshow viewer, it will be
| | 00:44 | selected, and you could see
the properties for the Slide.
| | 00:48 | And the slide itself also
has three different tabs.
| | 00:50 | You could adjust the Basic,
Transition and Effects areas here.
| | 00:54 | So it does get confusing because you
might be looking either here in the
| | 00:57 | Slideshow viewer for options or in
the Properties panel for Slide or the
| | 01:01 | Properties panel for
Slideshows looking for options.
| | 01:04 | So again, keep that in mind that it is
a little bit of challenge finding the
| | 01:07 | options you're needing, but the good
news is is that you don't need every
| | 01:11 | option for every project.
| | 01:12 | You'll find that you use only a
few of these, and then it's easy to
| | 01:15 | remember where they are.
| | 01:17 | It's also important to remember the
distinction between the image here in the
| | 01:21 | Slideshow Viewer and the
image here in the Project panel.
| | 01:24 | So if I were to, for example, find this
image here, I could go through the Project
| | 01:29 | panel here, kind of browse around until
I found that one, and that's going to be
| | 01:34 | here, the harbor_ducks image.
| | 01:36 | If I have this selected in the Project
panel, then it's not really a slide in
| | 01:41 | the slideshow, it's just considered an asset.
| | 01:43 | So if I select the image here to
fiddle with it, then you'll see that in the
| | 01:46 | Properties panel I just have the
generic Asset properties, and it's really not
| | 01:50 | much you could do here.
| | 01:51 | So if you want to adjust that
slide, you'll need to select it in the
| | 01:54 | actual Slideshow Viewer.
| | 01:56 | Now again, there is tons of great features here.
| | 01:58 | If I select this slide, and I'm
looking at the Slide Properties,
| | 02:00 | for example, the Basic tab,
we can change the Scale.
| | 02:03 | For this image, I did not go through
| | 02:06 | and go into like an Image Editor
like Photoshop and crop this correctly.
| | 02:10 | So it has a vertical, or portrait,
orientation, rather than a sideways, or
| | 02:15 | landscape, orientation, and so it's a
really good idea to go in to your image and
| | 02:18 | make sure you crop them and adjust them,
so that when they're brought in, in
| | 02:21 | your slideshow they have the right orientation.
| | 02:23 | We could go to Scale here and by default,
| | 02:25 | it's Scale and Apply Matte.
| | 02:27 | Encore shrinks this down so the whole
image fits and applies a Matte on the sides.
| | 02:32 | We could also choose to
Scale and Crop the Edges.
| | 02:35 | So basically this will fit as far as
the width goes, and then it will crop the
| | 02:39 | edges, and we could also just have it
Do Nothing and have it be full size, and
| | 02:44 | now we're just looking at the center
of the image, which in this case is very
| | 02:47 | similar to Scale and Crop Edges.
| | 02:48 | But even though it's cropping off a lot
of important areas of the image, you may
| | 02:52 | prefer to choose this option just so
you couldn't fill the whole screen and not
| | 02:55 | have a bunch of black on the sides.
| | 02:57 | Now also in the Properties panel, we
can choose whether we want this slide to
| | 03:01 | Match the Slideshow or not.
| | 03:03 | As we go through this chapter, we're
going to be looking to all these cool
| | 03:05 | things you could do for the
slideshow, and if you want like some renegade
| | 03:08 | slide that has some different
properties than the rest of the slideshow, then you
| | 03:11 | could uncheck Match Slideshow and give it a
longer or shorter Duration, or what have you.
| | 03:16 | So again, to recap, if you're going to
fiddle with your slideshow and customize
| | 03:19 | it, you could adjust the slideshow
options in the Slideshow Viewer here or the
| | 03:23 | Slide Properties or the Slideshow Properties.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding motion and transitions| 00:00 | All right. These next couple of movies cover the
feature that I really think just make
| | 00:04 | Encore Slideshows as awesome as they are.
| | 00:06 | What I'm going to do is I'm going to
select the slideshow here in the Project
| | 00:09 | panel, so I could look at
the Slideshow Properties.
| | 00:11 | Now one of the thing that's really
boring about slideshows traditionally, like
| | 00:15 | the actual like literal slideshows, is
that you know you play it, and you're
| | 00:19 | watching this slide forever, it's
describing it, and then they click a
| | 00:22 | little button on the remote
control, it goes the next slide.
| | 00:25 | That's just very boring.
| | 00:26 | So what we're going to do is go back to
the Slideshow here and what I could do
| | 00:29 | is check Random Pan & Zoom.
| | 00:33 | What this will allow you to do is to
go in as a viewer, and you will see the
| | 00:37 | slides kind of coming towards you and
moving side to side in this random way and
| | 00:42 | if I click Play here,
you'll see a big difference.
| | 00:52 | See it's significantly more engaging.
| | 00:54 | There's just random motion to every
single slide and to people that are watching
| | 00:58 | this slideshow, they don't know
that Encore did this automatically.
| | 01:01 | So it seems like you put all this work
and effort into making these image kind
| | 01:05 | of come toward the viewer and pan
side to side, just a really great look.
| | 01:09 | Another thing I'm going to do to make
this more interesting to the viewer is
| | 01:12 | I'm going to click on the Slideshow,
and I'm going to do them a favor and take
| | 01:16 | down the Slide Duration.
| | 01:17 | By default, it's 6 seconds long for each slide.
| | 01:19 | That's a little bit too long
for just looking at pictures.
| | 01:22 | If we're going to describe
something then 6 seconds might be good.
| | 01:25 | It's a little long for my taste, so I'm
going to select this, and I'm actually
| | 01:28 | going to type 3., that will type 3, and
then it will advance it over to the next spot.
| | 01:35 | So this will actually create a
3-second-long slide duration.
| | 01:39 | If we just hit the Enter key, you'll
see that it converts it automatically to 3
| | 01:43 | seconds, a little trick there.
| | 01:44 | Now if we click on a single slide to look at
its properties, we could look at its effects.
| | 01:49 | So you could see Pan & Zoom is here and
if we wanted to, what we could do is we
| | 01:54 | can manually control the Pan of every slide.
| | 01:56 | So we could have it go Southeast to
Northwest, from East to Center or whatever.
| | 02:01 | So if there's a certain look we're
looking for, for a particular slide, like
| | 02:04 | there's a car that's going from left
to right in the shot, we could actually
| | 02:07 | move the slide from left to right
| | 02:10 | to mimic what's going on
with the car, if we wanted to.
| | 02:12 | We could also change the zoom.
| | 02:14 | We could have it zoom in, or zoom out, or nothing.
| | 02:16 | So we don't have to do Random Pan &
Zoom and again, this could be manually
| | 02:20 | adjusted for every slide, but it's just
so easy to have Encore do the work for you.
| | 02:24 | Now also with the slide, we can set up
a transition, Dip to Black or to do a
| | 02:29 | Wipe, Push, Slide, all these different
cool little effects from slide to slide.
| | 02:33 | But again, it's really tedious to do
this manually for every slide in your
| | 02:37 | slideshow, especially if you have a few
hundred images to go through for all
| | 02:41 | of your slideshows.
| | 02:42 | So what I'm going to do is click on the
Slideshow again, and I'm going to go to
| | 02:45 | the Transition here, and if we change
the Transition for the entire slideshow,
| | 02:50 | then what it's going to do is it's
going to change the transitions for all the
| | 02:53 | slides in the whole slideshow.
| | 02:55 | And then as long as each slide has
the Match Slideshow option checked for
| | 02:59 | Transitions, then they will
all perform the same transition.
| | 03:03 | I'm going to change the
Transition to Cross Dissolve.
| | 03:06 | What that's going to do, as you could
see here, we have a kind of like a cross
| | 03:09 | fade, and we'll see how much more
interesting this makes our slideshow.
| | 03:13 | Actually I'm going to go back to the
beginning, just click on that first
| | 03:16 | slide. Let's start here.
| | 03:18 | (Music playing.)
| | 03:28 | See, now that's a slideshow I
don't mind sitting through.
| | 03:32 | Every slide is moving as it goes from
one slide to the next. There's this beautiful,
| | 03:35 | soft Cross Dissolve transition, and it's
just a much more engaging presentation.
| | 03:40 | Now one quick word here, when we
added the Random Pan & Zoom, we notice
| | 03:44 | the Effects icon in the bottom right and a
little red line over the top of the slide.
| | 03:49 | So the Effects icon indicates that
we have added one of the effects.
| | 03:55 | We have added a Pan or a Zoom effect to
this slide and this little square here
| | 04:00 | indicates a transition.
| | 04:01 | So there's transition applied for this slide.
| | 04:03 | So when you see these
icons that is what they mean.
| | 04:06 | The red line here is basically saying
that this is not a rendered slideshow.
| | 04:10 | We could click this button here to
render the slideshow, so that the effects and
| | 04:13 | transitions will play back in real speed.
| | 04:15 | You might notice that the computer is
kind of chugging along here as it was
| | 04:18 | playing back the slideshow.
| | 04:20 | So we can click this button to render
the slideshow, and then we preview it.
| | 04:23 | It will be perfect, and
that red line will go away.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing slideshows to audio| 00:01 | My other favorite Encore Slideshow
feature is the ability to sync our entire
| | 00:05 | slideshow to the duration of a
single or multiple audio tracks.
| | 00:10 | So we could bring in a bunch of audio
tracks if we want to, and then what we
| | 00:13 | could do is choose Fit Slideshow to Audio
Duration. It we'll look at all of the audio tracks,
| | 00:18 | we can drag into this slideshow and
add it up and then make this slideshow
| | 00:22 | automatically last as long as the audio track.
| | 00:24 | For example, if we play this one,
you'll notice that the audio track is 20
| | 00:28 | seconds and 9 frames, and that gives
out about slide 7 here and then for the
| | 00:33 | remainder of the slides we have
no music, there is nothing there.
| | 00:36 | It's just empty space,
which could be really awkward.
| | 00:38 | So what we could do, instead of
having to divide up like 20 seconds and 9
| | 00:42 | frames divide it by 12 images, what we could do
is just check Fit Slideshow to Audio Duration.
| | 00:47 | In that case, it will ignore the
slide duration that we have added, and it will
| | 00:52 | automatically create a new slide
duration by dividing the time each slide is on
| | 00:56 | frame by the duration of the audio tracks.
| | 01:00 | In this case, it makes each slide
duration 1 second and 21 frames.
| | 01:04 | A little short, but we'll see how that goes.
| | 01:06 | I'm going to click on Slide 1,
and now let's play our slideshow.
| | 01:11 | (Music playing.)
| | 01:27 | All right. Good.
| | 01:29 | Now in the case of our particular audio
track, it fades out and has a long tail
| | 01:34 | at the end, as far as the audio goes.
| | 01:35 | So it's fading out for several seconds.
| | 01:37 | There are a few slides that are in
apparent silence, even though it's really the
| | 01:41 | audio track fading out.
| | 01:43 | Now another thing that we could do,
I'm going to click a blank space in the
| | 01:46 | Slideshow Viewer to select the
Slideshow in the Properties panel, and then we
| | 01:49 | could go to the Transition tab in the
Slideshow Properties, and we could change
| | 01:53 | the Duration of the Cross Dissolve.
| | 01:54 | Because right now the Duration of the
Cross Dissolve is two seconds, although
| | 01:57 | the entire Slide Duration is
only 1 second and 21 frames.
| | 02:01 | So the duration of the Cross Dissolve is
actually lasting longer than each slide.
| | 02:06 | So I'm going to take this to actually
just a few frames here, maybe like 15
| | 02:11 | frames, and then if we go back, we'll
still have this nice, soft fade from slide
| | 02:17 | to slide, but it will
happen much more quickly.
| | 02:19 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:27 | Very nice.
| | 02:28 | It's a slide and then a very brief but
soft Cross Dissolve to the next slide.
| | 02:34 | Now another audio option that you have,
if I uncheck Fit Slideshow to Audio
| | 02:38 | Duration, is I could check Loop Audio.
| | 02:40 | So maybe you have the Slide
Duration exactly the way you want it.
| | 02:43 | Maybe you have a 4-minute presentation
that you need to fill and so it's got to
| | 02:47 | be 4 minutes, and you don't
want to change it to the audio.
| | 02:49 | What you do is choose Loop Audio, and
that will just keep playing the audio over
| | 02:53 | and over and over again
until the slides are done.
| | 02:56 | Now this Fit Slideshow to Audio Duration
is one of the greatest features of all time.
| | 03:00 | Again, I have mention before I've done
a few wedding slideshows, and you could
| | 03:04 | always the couple picture like
fading out while the song is going.
| | 03:08 | It's just magical and Encore makes
it so that setting up these beautiful
| | 03:12 | dramatic moments like this timed
to music, works out just perfectly.
| | 03:16 | It makes me look like a champ every
time, with very little work on my part.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Slideshows and bit budgeting| 00:00 | Now we've got our final slideshow
project here, which is really awesome, and
| | 00:04 | we're going to talk later on this
training series in the chapter about using
| | 00:07 | Encore as a presentation tool, a
little bit more than about slideshows.
| | 00:09 | But before we do this chapter, I want
you be aware of an important concept as
| | 00:13 | far as slideshows and bit budgeting goes.
| | 00:16 | You're trying to plan your menus
in how much space that you have.
| | 00:19 | When you have these slides that just go
from slide to side, but there is no effects,
| | 00:22 | there is no transitions, just solid
slide to slide to slide, then Encore treats
| | 00:27 | them as just pictures.
| | 00:29 | They basically take up no space, maybe a
just a little tiny bit of space, on the DVD.
| | 00:34 | So you can have a boring slideshow like
that on a menu with a full-length movie
| | 00:38 | and probably not have any problems.
| | 00:40 | It probably won't affect the
compression of the movie at all.
| | 00:43 | However, when you add a transition, what
Encore does is that it renders the slide
| | 00:49 | itself as a picture, but for the entire
time that you have a transition going,
| | 00:53 | it has to render that out as a movie.
| | 00:56 | That will add a lot to your bit
budgeting and to the size of your project.
| | 01:01 | If you use the Random Pan & Zoom,
which you actually find here in the
| | 01:05 | Slideshow Viewer as well,
| | 01:06 | the Random Pan & Zoom will make it
so that it will render the entire
| | 01:09 | slideshow as a movie file.
| | 01:13 | In other words, if you have like a 20
minute long slideshow and you're using
| | 01:17 | Random Pan & Zoom, it's just
like you had a 20 minute movie.
| | 01:20 | So to tone things down and still keep
it interesting, you can use just still
| | 01:25 | images with a transition.
| | 01:27 | If that's still too big for you, then
you could remove the transitions and the
| | 01:31 | Random Pan & Zoom effects as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Using PlaylistsWhat is a playlist?| 00:00 | In this brief chapter, we're going to
look at Playlists, which will allow you to
| | 00:04 | give your viewers more
control over what they're watching.
| | 00:07 | Now this concept is a little bit more
complex than most of the stuff we've looked at.
| | 00:10 | So I need you to follow along with me as I
explain what I've done with this project here.
| | 00:15 | Now we have four Timelines in our project,
and there's a Movie in each of these timelines.
| | 00:21 | If I click on the Play All button, I've set
it up so that it plays all of these timelines.
| | 00:26 | The button, as you can see here in the
Properties panel, is set up to play Ocean Movie 1.
| | 00:30 | So it's going to go to Ocean Movie 1.
The end action of Ocean Movie 1 is not to
| | 00:37 | go back to the menu, but to
play the Ocean Movie 2 Timeline.
| | 00:41 | So we'll play the Ocean Movie 2 Timeline.
| | 00:43 | Now in the Ocean Movie 2 Timeline, its
End Action is set up to go to Olive Movie 1.
| | 00:49 | The Olive Movie 1's End Action is set up
to go to Olive Movie 2, and then the End
| | 00:53 | Action of Olive Movie 2
is to go back to the menu.
| | 00:56 | So basically they play in this order.
| | 00:58 | Ocean Movie 1, 2, Olive Movie 1
and 2 and then back to the menu.
| | 01:02 | But what if your viewers don't want to
see the Olive Movies, or don't want to
| | 01:07 | see the Ocean Movies?
| | 01:08 | You want to be able to give them
the control over what they want.
| | 01:11 | But the problem is that if they were to
go watch just the Ocean Movies then the
| | 01:16 | End Action of the Ocean Movie
is to go to the Olive Movies.
| | 01:19 | So what we can do is create a Playlist.
| | 01:22 | So, for example, we have
these Ocean Movies here.
| | 01:26 | So what I'm going to do is go down to
the bottom of the Project panel here.
| | 01:28 | I'm going to create a New Playlist.
| | 01:31 | I'm going to call this Ocean Movie Playlist.
| | 01:36 | Now let's go ahead and go to our
Playlist, go ahead and click once on it and
| | 01:43 | once it's clicked once, we could
see it in the Properties panel.
| | 01:46 | So what I'm going to do, actually, I'm
just going to go ahead and delete this,
| | 01:52 | I'm going to drag Ocean Movie 1,
actually, I can't do that I'm sorry.
| | 01:56 | I need to use the Pick whip
here in the Properties panel.
| | 01:59 | Use the pick whip to select Ocean
Movie 1, and then next, I'm going to select,
| | 02:04 | with the pick whip, Ocean Movie 2.
| | 02:07 | So it's going to play Ocean Movie 1 and
then Ocean Movie 2, and I could actually
| | 02:13 | drag and drop and rearrange these,
actually using these arrows here if I wanted
| | 02:17 | to, and then I want the End
Action to go back to the menu.
| | 02:23 | Next, I need to link it up so that the
Ocean Movies button links to this Playlist.
| | 02:29 | Now when users click on this Ocean
Movies button, assuming they just want to see
| | 02:33 | the Ocean Movies only,
| | 02:35 | it will go to this Playlist, which will
play Ocean Movie 1, Ocean Movie 2, and
| | 02:41 | then the End Action will
take it back to the menu.
| | 02:43 | Let's do that one more
time for the Olive Oil Movies.
| | 02:47 | I'm going to create a New Playlist.
| | 02:49 | We'll call this Olive Oil Movie
Playlist, and then I will select it in the
| | 02:58 | Project panel and then making sure
that it's selected here in my Properties
| | 03:02 | panel, I'm going to drag a pick whip to
Olive Movie 1, then Olive Movie 2, set
| | 03:10 | an End Action to go back to the menu,
| | 03:13 | once it's done with these two
timelines, and now we just need to link this
| | 03:17 | button up in the menu to
the Olive Oil Movie Playlist.
| | 03:24 | So now we have a project, or a menu,
that allows users to get what they want.
| | 03:30 | They can Play All if they want to, and
they will all play in order, as expected,
| | 03:35 | or they could look at just the Ocean
Movies, or just the Olive Oil Movies, and we
| | 03:40 | give them control over that by using Playlists.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using chapter playlists| 00:00 | Chapter Playlist are very similar to
the playlists we just looked at in the last
| | 00:03 | movie, almost identical, in fact,
except that the Chapter Playlist gives you
| | 00:07 | control over what viewers are
watching within a given Timeline.
| | 00:12 | So previously, when we looked at the
playlist, you can choose different Timelines
| | 00:16 | and what order they are played in, and
for Chapter Playlists it allows you to look
| | 00:21 | at the different chapters of a Timeline
and pick and choose in what order those
| | 00:27 | chapters are watched.
| | 00:29 | Now here we have a clip.
| | 00:30 | It's not a full-length movie, but for our
purposes here it's fairly long, over 6 minutes long.
| | 00:35 | It's a travel podcast, and
we start with this intro here.
| | 00:38 | This is the first chapter.
| | 00:40 | And the second chapter is basically
an introduction, Welcome to the Explore
| | 00:44 | California podcast, and then the
third chapter are viewer pictures.
| | 00:49 | The fourth chapter, as you could see
here, this is using chapter four and
| | 00:54 | chapter five. Chapter four is a very
long tour through an olive factory here,
| | 01:00 | Ohio Olive Oil, and it
basically takes up the entire podcast.
| | 01:04 | It's the what the podcast is about. And
then we wrap up with this final little
| | 01:08 | Snowboard California thing where there
is all these cool like snowboarding clips
| | 01:12 | for the last little piece of it.
| | 01:13 | So let's see, for example, that we
want to make it so if viewers are not
| | 01:18 | interested in the Olive Oil, they can
skip it and watch the entire podcast
| | 01:23 | except for the Olive Oil segment.
| | 01:26 | So you can come down here to the New
button in the Project panel and create a
| | 01:29 | new Chapter Playlist.
| | 01:31 | And again, remember that Chapter
Playlists allow you to play different
| | 01:34 | chapters within a Timeline.
| | 01:37 | So we need to select the
Timeline we're going to be
| | 01:39 | using and click OK.
| | 01:40 | We're then brought to yet another viewer,
this time the Chapter Playlist viewer.
| | 01:46 | And so here are the different chapters
in our Timeline, and we need to move them
| | 01:51 | over here to our Chapter Playlist.
| | 01:53 | So we'll bring over Chapter 1, Chapter
2, Chapter 3, and we're going to skip
| | 01:59 | Chapter 4 because that's the Olive Oil
presentation one, and then Chapter 5.
| | 02:04 | So if we were to link to this Chapter
Playlist from a menu button, for example,
| | 02:07 | people were to watch this, it would
play chapters 1, 2, 3 and 5 in that order.
| | 02:13 | Now we can shuffle and rearrange.
| | 02:15 | We can drag and drop to our heart's content.
| | 02:17 | We don't necessarily have to go in order,
and that's the benefit of a Chapter Playlist.
| | 02:21 | And again, just like regular
playlists, this is incredibly handy.
| | 02:24 | Let's say you had a really long
video with tons of stuff in it,
| | 02:27 | let's say for a sporting event, for example.
| | 02:29 | Let's say you have this long 2 hour
game, and you don't want people have to
| | 02:33 | sit and watch do the whole thing,
maybe you just want to jump in and get the
| | 02:36 | highlights, or maybe they just want to
see when the goals were scored or whatever.
| | 02:40 | So the Chapter Playlist will allow you
to let viewer see just the key elements,
| | 02:45 | maybe you can make a Chapter Playlist of
when one team scored the goals and then
| | 02:49 | maybe another Chapter Playlist
when the other team scored goals.
| | 02:52 | So again, Chapter Playlists are another
way that you will allow viewers to get
| | 02:56 | to the content that they want.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. Using Audio and SubtitlesUsing audio in Encore| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to look
at using audio and subtitle tracks.
| | 00:04 | Now I've already imported a video
asset and made a timeline out of it, and we
| | 00:09 | are looking at that here in this viewer.
| | 00:11 | I've also imported an audio asset,
and you could distinguish between video
| | 00:14 | assets and audio assets because video
assets have the filmstrip and audio assets
| | 00:18 | have the speaker icon.
| | 00:20 | Now if I were to add this audio to this
clip of these bicycling guys, if I were
| | 00:27 | to drag and drop this, then it's going to
make a new audio track, as you can see here.
| | 00:33 | We can add it to the same audio track.
| | 00:35 | It would overwrite the audio, and I
can also create a new track this way.
| | 00:39 | Now if you're familiar with a video
editing program, you will know that this is
| | 00:44 | nothing new here, a new audio track is created.
| | 00:46 | However, this is very
different than what you might expect.
| | 00:50 | We cannot add audio to this video.
| | 00:54 | If you were going to add this music to
this video clip, you would need to do
| | 00:59 | that in a different program,
such as a video editing program.
| | 01:03 | You'll see that once I added this audio
track, this speaker icon turned off for
| | 01:08 | this clips audio and
turned on for this music tracks.
| | 01:12 | So we cannot have both
playing at the same time in Encore.
| | 01:16 | So your audio in Encore needs to be premixed.
| | 01:19 | We can turn it off by clicking
the speaker icon here, but these are
| | 01:23 | mutually exclusive.
| | 01:24 | We cannot have both of
them playing at the same time.
| | 01:28 | As we see, as we go throughout this
chapter, multiple audio tracks in Encore are
| | 01:32 | not meant, as they are in video
editing programs, to make like a sound mix.
| | 01:35 | The audio tracks in Encore are
typically meant for different languages, or
| | 01:41 | perhaps even a commentary track.
| | 01:43 | So for now, just be aware of that going forward.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding audio to a menu| 00:00 | Now this doesn't particularly pertain
to working with audio in a Timeline, but
| | 00:05 | one of the tricks you can do with audio is
actually add it to the background of a menu.
| | 00:08 | So that way while users are watching
your menu trying to figure out what to
| | 00:13 | pick, they have a nice little audio
track in the background kind of entertaining
| | 00:16 | them and keeping them company.
| | 00:18 | The way to do this is
simply import an audio track.
| | 00:20 | I've already done that for you here,
and simply drag and drop it onto a menu.
| | 00:26 | Now don't drag and drop it onto a button
or anything, just some blank area in the
| | 00:29 | background and just let go.
| | 00:32 | Now the bummer here is there's no
confirmation saying, hey good job.
| | 00:35 | You added audio to a menu or
anything. It just happened.
| | 00:38 | To double-check it, you can click the
menu in the Project panel to see it in the
| | 00:42 | Properties panel here. Then click the
Motion tab, which doesn't really make very
| | 00:46 | much sense at all, but in the Motion tab
there is an audio area and here is the
| | 00:51 | audio track that we've added.
| | 00:53 | You can also additionally use the
pick whip to select an audio track to use
| | 00:58 | as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Allowing users to change languages| 00:01 | In this movie, we're going to look at
how to allow users to change the language
| | 00:06 | that they're listening to.
| | 00:08 | Basically, what we're going to be
doing here is changing the audio track
| | 00:11 | that users are listening to so you can
put audio commentary, or an alternate
| | 00:16 | audio take, or whatever in there in
its place, but we're just going to be
| | 00:19 | using languages here.
| | 00:20 | This trick is actually a little
more challenging than you might expect.
| | 00:24 | Let me go through the
setup for what I have here.
| | 00:26 | I have two menus in this project.
| | 00:28 | I have the Main menu, which links to
our Timeline, which is basically this
| | 00:33 | ocean footage here.
| | 00:34 | That's all it's going on in that Timeline.
| | 00:36 | Then we have a button that
links to our Languages menu.
| | 00:40 | So if I go over to the menus here,
double-click on Language menu, here is our
| | 00:45 | menu Language, where users will be
able to choose the language that they want
| | 00:48 | to view our content in.
| | 00:50 | So we have English, Spanish, and Italian.
| | 00:53 | I speak none of these languages,
including English, very well.
| | 00:57 | So what I did is I went and had a
computer reader create an English, Italian
| | 01:01 | and Spanish tracks.
| | 01:02 | So the English Tracks sounds like this.
(Computerized Male Voice: I am speaking English.)
| | 01:06 | Italian.
(Computerized Male Voice: Now, I am speaking Italian.)
| | 01:08 | And Spanish.
(Computerized Female Voice: I am a voice that speaks Spanish.)
| | 01:13 | Beautiful.
| | 01:14 | So the first thing we need to do is
create audio tracks for each of our
| | 01:18 | different languages.
| | 01:20 | So I'm going to drag English
down to my Timeline on a new Track.
| | 01:25 | Let's do Spanish, and then Italian.
| | 01:30 | Actually, it's not letting
me add another track that way.
| | 01:32 | So I'm just going to right-click on the
audio track name and choose Add Audio Track.
| | 01:39 | I can actually scroll down if I need to,
or I can drag this divider bar here,
| | 01:45 | which allows me to see more of my tracks.
| | 01:48 | Now I can easily add Italian to Audio Track 4.
| | 01:53 | Now something else that helps is
we can change the language here.
| | 01:57 | It doesn't really do anything.
| | 01:58 | It's just kind of a way for us to
keep track of the languages that we have
| | 02:02 | on that audio track.
| | 02:03 | So for Audio Track 3, I'm going
to change en to Espanol, Spanish.
| | 02:09 | So I'm going to go down, look for
Spanish under S. The abbreviation is es.
| | 02:15 | Then I'm going to change Italian.
| | 02:17 | From this dropdown, we'll find Italian
from the menu here it, IT, and these little
| | 02:22 | abbreviations, again, help us
to keep track of these languages.
| | 02:25 | It's important that you stick to a format.
| | 02:28 | You create a system that you have, if
you have multiple timelines, for example,
| | 02:33 | if you're going to have English on
Audio Track 2 here, then you have English on
| | 02:36 | Audio Track 2 on all of your Timelines.
| | 02:39 | If you're going to have Spanish on
Track 3, then you have Spanish on Track 3 on
| | 02:42 | all of your Timelines, and so forth.
| | 02:45 | Now, with all our audio clips on
different tracks, we're now ready to start
| | 02:52 | setting up our links here.
| | 02:55 | So what I'm going to do is I'm
going to click the Italian button here.
| | 03:01 | Again, what I want to happen is that
when users click Italian, from now on,
| | 03:06 | they're going to be
watching all timelines in Italian.
| | 03:10 | So the way that I do that is by
clicking this button, going to the Link area in
| | 03:14 | the Properties panel, and instead of
using the pick whip or typing anything,
| | 03:18 | we're going to go to this little arrow
on the right-hand side, click this, and
| | 03:22 | at the very bottom, choose Specify Link.
| | 03:27 | Now what we're going to do is
change the Audio to Track 4 for Italian.
| | 03:35 | Now we can't click OK yet.
| | 03:36 | It's not giving us that choice, because
we've not actually set a link for the button.
| | 03:41 | All buttons have to have links to something.
| | 03:44 | So even though we've had this button
change the audio track, it still has
| | 03:48 | to have a destination.
| | 03:50 | Well, what I want users to do is just
to come back to the same menu, even with
| | 03:53 | the same button selected.
| | 03:55 | So let's go to the Language menu.
| | 03:59 | I need not just choose the Language menu.
| | 04:01 | I want to maintain the
Italian button on the Language menu.
| | 04:05 | So we could just choose a Language
menu and click OK, and then it choose the
| | 04:09 | default button, which is
English, and that's not what I want.
| | 04:11 | I want the Italian button to be still selected.
| | 04:15 | So I click OK here.
| | 04:16 | When users click Italian, the menu
will just kind of flash for a second, and
| | 04:20 | they will still be selecting the Italian menu.
| | 04:23 | Let's try this again with a Spanish button.
| | 04:24 | I'm going to click Spanish, and go to
the Link area here, go to the flyout menu,
| | 04:30 | choose Specify Link.
| | 04:33 | This time we're going to change the
Audio Tracks 3, because that's what track
| | 04:36 | our Spanish is on, Audio 3.
| | 04:40 | Language menu, and we'll choose the
Spanish button in the Language menu.
| | 04:45 | So again, we're linking it to itself. Click OK.
| | 04:47 | Do this again with English.
| | 04:49 | Final test here, English, Specify Link,
Audio Track 2, Language menu, English,
| | 04:58 | OK, and now we are ready to
preview our menu and see what we have.
| | 05:04 | So the Main menu is our first play objects.
| | 05:08 | Let's go ahead and click the
Preview button to preview this from there.
| | 05:12 | Before we watch our Timeline, let's go to
the Languages menu, and let's choose English.
| | 05:19 | There should be no change here. That's fine.
| | 05:21 | Then we'll go back to the Main
menu, and we'll play our Timeline.
| | 05:24 | Hopefully, hear English.
(Computerized Male Voice: I am speaking English.)
| | 05:29 | Beautiful!
| | 05:29 | Okay, so let's go back to the menu
with this menu Button here, click that.
| | 05:33 | Let's go back to Languages.
| | 05:35 | Let's choose Spanish this time,
Main menu, Timeline.
| | 05:41 | (Computerized Female Voice: I am the voice that speaks Spanish.)
| | 05:44 | Beautiful!
| | 05:45 | Now what we can also do is that we can
use this dropdown to preview different
| | 05:50 | audio tracks as well.
| | 05:51 | So if we have a commentary track,
I'll just go ahead and just choose
| | 05:54 | Italian for right now,
| | 05:55 | then I'm going to go ahead and rewind it
by clicking this button.
| | 05:58 | (Computerized Male Voice: Now, I am speaking Italian.)
| | 06:01 | So we can preview the audio tracks
again from this dropdown, or whatever.
| | 06:05 | If we have a commentary, or whatever, we
can preview, again, from that dropdown.
| | 06:09 | As I mentioned before, if you don't
change the Timeline permissions, then users
| | 06:13 | will be able to switch audio tracks
with their remote control, but it's not as
| | 06:19 | clear cut, and it's a little bit better
if we give them the choice, visually, with
| | 06:24 | a Language menu like this.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating subtitles| 00:00 | So now we're going to talk
about creating subtitles,
| | 00:02 | basically, text at the bottom of the
screen that describes what is going on.
| | 00:07 | Also, it's good for translating what is
being said in two different languages.
| | 00:12 | Now we create subtitles by
starting out in the Timeline.
| | 00:16 | If we right-click right below an audio track,
we get to the option to Add an Audio Track.
| | 00:21 | Now we looked in the last movie
about how we have this divider line here.
| | 00:24 | Well, if we go below the divider
line and then right-click, we will Add a
| | 00:28 | Subtitle Track instead of an Audio Track.
| | 00:31 | So when you have this divider in the
Timeline panel, everything north of this
| | 00:34 | line is for audio, south of
this line is for subtitles.
| | 00:38 | So I'm going to right-click,
create a new Subtitle Track.
| | 00:42 | Now we can go in with the Type tool,
and click and add some text, some
| | 00:50 | subtitles here Please
enjoy some olives with me.
| | 00:57 | We can click the Selection tool to accept that.
| | 01:00 | We can move this wherever
you wanted to onscreen.
| | 01:02 | We can resize it with the
corners if we wanted to.
| | 01:05 | Here we have this little clip here.
| | 01:06 | If you're familiar with a video
editing program, it works the same way.
| | 01:09 | We could trim the beginning or the end to
extend this, make this as long as we want.
| | 01:13 | We can also click and drag the
middle of the clip to move it in time.
| | 01:18 | Notice that where my Current Time
Indicator is that this subtitle is not.
| | 01:22 | So I'm not seeing it onscreen.
| | 01:24 | But if I back up to where it is,
then I will see it onscreen.
| | 01:28 | To add another subtitle clip, we could
simply move our cursor to where we want
| | 01:33 | another subtitle clip to be, and we
can just click to type another Subtitle.
| | 01:38 | Olives are over there.
| | 01:42 | We'll go ahead and click the
Selection tool, and click away to accept it.
| | 01:46 | Now on the left side of the Timeline
panel, we could use these little arrows
| | 01:51 | here to navigate to the beginning
of all our different subtitle clips.
| | 01:55 | So I can click these arrows here, and
you can see that I'm jumping back and
| | 01:58 | forth between the beginnings of
these different subtitle clips.
| | 02:02 | Those are the basics of
creating and editing subtitles.
| | 02:08 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing and exporting subtitles| 00:00 | If you're working on a short
project, it's really no big deal just to
| | 00:04 | manually create your own subtitles,
or actually, if you're working on a
| | 00:07 | really big project, let's say you're
working on a really long science fiction
| | 00:11 | movie, DVD, maybe there is like a
brief part where aliens talk some jibberish
| | 00:15 | or something like that.
| | 00:16 | So you just need to make a quick subtitle.
| | 00:17 | No big deal, knock yourself out,
go ahead and do in Encore, but for
| | 00:21 | full-length projects,
| | 00:22 | if you're going to have subtitles over
a full-length movie, then typically that
| | 00:26 | job is outsourced to a
company that does subtitles.
| | 00:29 | So if we right-click in the subtitle
area, we can see that we can Import
| | 00:32 | Subtitles in three ways.
| | 00:34 | We can import Text Script,
which we will in the moment.
| | 00:36 | Also, there is a FAB Images
Script, and also an Image Script.
| | 00:40 | Oftentimes, these can come
from the company that does scripts.
| | 00:45 | So if you have one of these,
you can import it there as well.
| | 00:48 | Before I import the Text Script, I want
to show you what it looks like in case
| | 00:51 | you need to create
something like this on your own.
| | 00:54 | Here is the Text Script.
| | 00:55 | Basically, what it does is that it
numbers these different subtitle clips, and
| | 01:00 | it gives the timecode of
when these will be imported.
| | 01:04 | So from two frames in to one second and 20
frames, the subtitle Checkout these dance moves!
| | 01:11 | is played, and then from 2 seconds to
3 seconds and 20 frames it says, Get
| | 01:15 | ready, and so on and so forth.
| | 01:17 | So, now let's go back and right-
click in the subtitle area, choose Import
| | 01:21 | Subtitles > Text Script.
| | 01:24 | Next, navigate to the Miscellaneous
Files folder in the Media folder of the
| | 01:28 | Exercise Files, and click on this
Subtitles.txt file and click Open.
| | 01:33 | We get this little Import Subtitles
dialog box here where we can change
| | 01:37 | some formatting issues.
| | 01:38 | If we wanted to change the font or the size,
or any of these other issues, we can do that.
| | 01:44 | We can also do that in the program.
| | 01:45 | This is kind of a preliminary check so
that all of your subtitles that you're
| | 01:49 | importing can be set by the same standard.
| | 01:52 | I'm just going to go ahead and
click OK, and leave things as is.
| | 01:55 | Now as expected, we can go out two
frames in our Timeline here, and see that our
| | 02:03 | subtitles begin at two frames in.
| | 02:05 | It says all the text that we expected it to say.
| | 02:07 | Basically, this guy, by the way
this is a clip from Ninja Death 3.
| | 02:11 | Now Check out these dance moves! Get ready.
| | 02:16 | Break it down. Fantastic!
| | 02:19 | Now we can also export subtitles as well.
| | 02:22 | We might want to send this out for
review. Maybe we're doing some translation
| | 02:27 | for a different language, when we want
somebody to preview and approve of our
| | 02:32 | translation or something,
| | 02:33 | we can right-click on the subtitle track.
| | 02:35 | I can choose Export Subtitles > Text
Script, and then I can navigate to where I
| | 02:41 | want to save this text file.
| | 02:43 | So that is how to import and export subtitles.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing subtitle color| 00:00 | When you have multiple characters in a
scene, sometimes it gets a little bit
| | 00:03 | confusing with the subtitles.
| | 00:05 | We have multiple bikers, in this case.
| | 00:08 | Somebody says, Hey, let's go ride bikes.
| | 00:11 | Then the next guy says, Yeah, let's do it!
| | 00:14 | We don't know who is saying what.
| | 00:17 | So, what we can do is actually
add some color variation here.
| | 00:22 | Now, you might be tempted to right-
click here and say Add Subtitle Track, then
| | 00:28 | make different texts on
the second subtitle track.
| | 00:32 | But be advised that subtitle tracks
work like audio tracks, in that they are
| | 00:39 | meant for different languages, and
they can only be used one at a time.
| | 00:45 | I might also recommend that your
Audio Track languages and your Subtitle
| | 00:49 | Track languages line up.
| | 00:51 | So if you have English on Track 2 for
Audio, then I recommend having English on
| | 00:56 | your Subtitle Track 2 as well.
| | 00:58 | If you have say Spanish on Track 3 for
Audio, I recommend that you have Spanish
| | 01:02 | on Track 3 for Subtitles also.
| | 01:04 | That's going to help you keep
things nice and orderly there.
| | 01:06 | I'm just going to right-click on
the second Subtitle Track and select
| | 01:10 | Remove Subtitle Track.
| | 01:12 | What I'm going to do to show you how
this works is go to the Timeline menu, and
| | 01:16 | I'm going to choose Edit Timeline Color Set.
| | 01:19 | Earlier in this training series, we
looked at Menu Color Sets when we talked
| | 01:22 | about Subpicture Highlights.
| | 01:23 | That was a little bit confusing.
| | 01:25 | This is much easier to deal with,
although it looks very similar.
| | 01:28 | So I'm going to choose Edit Timeline Color Set.
| | 01:31 | The Menu Colors that we looked at
before were for Subpicture Highlights.
| | 01:35 | The Timeline Colors are for Subtitles.
| | 01:38 | Now there are three different
options you have, three different groups
| | 01:41 | of Subtitle colors.
| | 01:43 | For each group, you can choose the
Fill, the basic color of the text, the
| | 01:47 | Stroke, the color of the
outline, and also the Anti-alias.
| | 01:51 | The Anti-alias is the color in
between the Fill and the Stroke.
| | 01:55 | If you choose this option here, this is
going to take the Anti-alias value from
| | 02:00 | the midpoint between the
Fill and the Stroke colors.
| | 02:03 | Now typically, this is what you see.
| | 02:05 | You have a light-colored
Fill with a dark-colored Stroke.
| | 02:07 | That way, it makes sure that your text
shows up whether or not you have a dark
| | 02:11 | background or a light background.
| | 02:13 | I'm actually not going to
change any of these colors here.
| | 02:16 | I'm just going to go ahead hit Cancel.
| | 02:18 | But with each clip, you're allowed to
choose which color set it's going to use.
| | 02:22 | So let's say, for example, we have
the Hey, let's go ride bikes clip.
| | 02:26 | We'll just leave that yellow text.
| | 02:27 | But for this, Yeah, let's do it.
| | 02:29 | Let's go ahead and change the color, so
it's obvious that this line of dialog is
| | 02:33 | coming from a different character.
| | 02:35 | So with this Subtitle clip selected
and highlighted, we could see here in the
| | 02:39 | Properties panel, we can also adjust the
text of the clip here in the Properties
| | 02:43 | panel, which is nice.
| | 02:44 | I'm going to change the Highlight from Group
1 to Group 2, and it becomes that pink color.
| | 02:49 | We could also choose Group 3 here as well.
| | 02:51 | Let's go ahead and leave
it set to Group 2 for now.
| | 02:54 | Now again, people can see that one
person says, Hey, let's go ride bikes, and
| | 02:58 | because of the color change, we
can see that somebody else is saying this.
| | 03:01 | This is also good for people who are
hearing-impaired and might not be able to
| | 03:06 | hear the different characters speaking.
| | 03:08 | Even if they are understanding the language,
they could visually see that there is a
| | 03:12 | difference in someone speaking.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
13. Advanced Authoring ConceptsThe power of end action overrides| 00:00 | Kind of like Playlists, End Action
Overrides are another way that you can give
| | 00:04 | your viewers more control
over what they are watching.
| | 00:08 | In this example, which is actually very
similar to the Playlist example, we have
| | 00:12 | a Play All button, which
plays a beach slideshow.
| | 00:16 | The End Action of the Beach
Slideshow is the Cal Orchards Slideshow.
| | 00:21 | Then we go back to the menu
after the Orchards Slideshow.
| | 00:26 | But what if when we want to play the
Beach Slideshow, we want it to just play
| | 00:30 | the Beach Slideshow, and then
come straight back to the menu.
| | 00:33 | Well, for that what we could do
is set up an End Action Override.
| | 00:38 | So with this Beach button selected, I'm
going to set the link as the Beach Slideshow.
| | 00:44 | Now the End Action of the Beach
Slideshow is to go to the Cal Orchards
| | 00:48 | Slideshow, but I don't want that to happen.
| | 00:50 | When they access the Beach Slideshow
from this Button, I want the End Action of
| | 00:56 | the Beach Slideshow to be different.
| | 00:58 | So I set up the new End Action here
in the Override area for this button.
| | 01:04 | So in other words, again, the Override,
the End Action Override is actually a
| | 01:10 | function of the button.
| | 01:12 | So, I have this Button selected still,
the Link is to Beach Slideshow. The
| | 01:16 | Override will be to take it back to the menu.
| | 01:20 | So what I'm going to do now, double-
check the Beach Slideshow, make sure the
| | 01:24 | Slide Duration is only 3 seconds.
| | 01:26 | Actually, we could take this down to 2 seconds.
| | 01:30 | Then I'm going to take the Cal Orchards
Slideshow Slide Duration to 2 seconds as well.
| | 01:34 | So when we preview this, it's not taking forever.
| | 01:37 | Let's go ahead and preview,
clicking the Preview button.
| | 01:40 | When we click the Play All button,
we play the first slideshow, the Beach
| | 01:48 | Slideshow, which again,
I have going really fast.
| | 01:50 | We don't have to sit here
waiting for this thing forever.
| | 01:56 | It's almost done here.
| | 01:57 | That's the final image.
| | 01:59 | End Action is to go to the Orchards Slideshow.
| | 02:02 | There are just a few images
here, and they don't move.
| | 02:07 | Then they go back to the menu.
| | 02:09 | So that is how we set up the
End Actions with the Slideshow.
| | 02:13 | Actually, I set that up
before the project started.
| | 02:15 | So now we're going to click on the Beach button.
| | 02:18 | This is going to take us
to the Beach Slideshow only.
| | 02:21 | Then hopefully, if everything has
been set up correctly, at the end of this
| | 02:28 | Beach Slideshow, we'll be taken back
to the menu, because the End Action of
| | 02:34 | the Beach Slideshow will have been
overridden by our End Action Override for
| | 02:40 | the Beach Button.
| | 02:42 | It has, and it worked.
| | 02:43 | So, End Action Overrides, again, just
like Playlist are another way that you can
| | 02:48 | control the way that viewers see your content.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using replacement layers| 00:00 | Sometimes, when you're playing around
with menus from Encore's Library, I've
| | 00:04 | noticed this particularly with the
Wedding Set especially, but you'll see,
| | 00:07 | sometimes images with this bowl
with the downwards-facing arrow in it.
| | 00:11 | This icon represents what is
called a replacement layer.
| | 00:14 | That is an object meant to be
replaced by a layer of your own.
| | 00:19 | Oftentimes, there is a certain cropping or
maybe certain effects applied to them in Photoshop.
| | 00:24 | Then those effects, or cropping, or
whatever carry over onto your images as well
| | 00:29 | without any work on your own.
| | 00:31 | So I've imported this beach_models photo here.
| | 00:34 | What I'm going to do is just drag and
drop on top of this replacement layer.
| | 00:39 | As soon as I let go, you notice it's faded a
little bit to blend it with the background.
| | 00:44 | It has been tilted to fit in with this
other background as well, kind of cool.
| | 00:49 | Let's look at another example.
| | 00:50 | I'm going to double-click
of this Bride menu here.
| | 00:53 | As we can see by this icon,
this also is a replacement layer.
| | 00:56 | So in other words, we're not supposed
to use this image of this bride here.
| | 01:00 | But we have a sepia tone.
| | 01:02 | We have some interesting contrast here.
| | 01:04 | We have some feathered edges.
| | 01:05 | So let's see what our image looks like
when applied to this replacement layer.
| | 01:10 | I select beach_models.jpg, our image,
drag and drop onto this image. Let go.
| | 01:16 | Boy, what a difference!
| | 01:17 | Look at those beautiful effects with the
soft, feathered edges with a sepia tone.
| | 01:21 | We have a little bit more intense
contrast, perhaps, or maybe that's just the
| | 01:25 | way the image looks.
| | 01:27 | But regardless, we have a lot of
those same effects from the original image
| | 01:31 | with the replacement layer, translated over into
our image without really any effort on our own.
| | 01:36 | So, be aware that when you see
that icon, that's what that means.
| | 01:40 | It means that you are supposed to use one
of your own images to replace what is there.
| | 01:46 | Now later on in this training series,
when we get to the chapter on Photoshop,
| | 01:49 | and we'll talk about how to create
menus from scratch and use those layer codes
| | 01:53 | and stuff like that,
| | 01:54 | I'll show you how to set up these
replacement layers, so that you can not only
| | 01:58 | utilize them with Encore's Library,
but also you can create them yourself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Looping motion menus| 00:00 | Sometimes, when you're working with
Motion menus, you could run into some problems.
| | 00:04 | I'm going to show you how
to fix those in this movie.
| | 00:06 | First, let me show you what I did.
| | 00:07 | I have this Scientific menu here.
| | 00:09 | This is a static, non-moving menu
that I found in the Encore Library.
| | 00:14 | Then I took this into Adobe
After Effects and animated it.
| | 00:18 | Let me show you what I did here.
| | 00:20 | This is what the movie looks like.
| | 00:22 | So the squares move around and then the
buttons come on, the text comes on, and
| | 00:27 | then the objects continue to animate.
| | 00:30 | So what I did is I held the Option
key on the Mac, Alt key on the PC, and
| | 00:35 | dragged this to the background and made
this the background for the Motion menu.
| | 00:40 | I've rendered the Motion menu.
| | 00:42 | If we preview this,
you'll see one of the problems.
| | 00:45 | I'm going to right-click on the menu in the
Project panel and choose Preview from Here.
| | 00:49 | Now already we have the Subpicture
Highlights active, even before the
| | 00:52 | buttons come on the screen. That's bad news.
| | 00:55 | Another object of bad news will come after
the 15-second mark, which we're getting to.
| | 01:01 | Watch this!
| | 01:02 | After 15 seconds, it repeats,
and the menu animates on again.
| | 01:07 | Well, we don't want this thing to
animate on every 15 seconds. That's terrible!
| | 01:12 | We also don't want Subpicture
Highlights indicating where buttons will be.
| | 01:15 | It just looks tacky.
| | 01:17 | I'm going to go ahead and click Exit and return.
| | 01:19 | The way that we're going to fix this
problem is by adjusting the Menu Loop Point.
| | 01:25 | So with the menu selected, I'm
going to go to the Properties panel and
| | 01:30 | choose the Motion tab.
| | 01:32 | Here we can access the Loop Point.
| | 01:35 | You see what I want to have
happen is I wanted to play the animation.
| | 01:39 | If we click this asset in the Project
panel, we'll see it's 15 seconds long.
| | 01:44 | The first five seconds
are the menu animating on.
| | 01:48 | The remaining 10 seconds are the good
seconds that we want to have the menu displaying.
| | 01:54 | So, with the menu selected, in the
Properties panel, Motion tab, I'm going to
| | 01:58 | change the Loop Point to 10 seconds, which
means that it will play for the first time.
| | 02:05 | It will animate on for the first five seconds.
| | 02:08 | Then it will play for
the rest of the 15 seconds.
| | 02:11 | Then it will loop back to the 5-second
mark and just keep playing the last 10
| | 02:16 | seconds over and over again.
| | 02:18 | Thus we will have our menu.
| | 02:20 | So let's select a menu in the Project panel,
click the Preview button, and see what we have.
| | 02:27 | Now as expected, we have our first
five seconds where the buttons animate on,
| | 02:33 | the text animates on.
| | 02:34 | It's all hunky-dory.
| | 02:36 | Then the telling part of this, to see if
we did this correctly, we'll see at the
| | 02:40 | end of the 15 seconds, what happens?
| | 02:43 | It just goes back to the 11-second mark.
| | 02:46 | It keeps looping, so that
we can just use our buttons.
| | 02:53 | This menu functions as normal
without going back to the beginning.
| | 02:56 | So, such is the power of Loop Points,
which allows us to control what part of
| | 03:03 | the Motion menu continues to get played back.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Replacing a menu| 00:00 | In this tutorial, we're going to look
at a feature that you probably won't use
| | 00:03 | every time you use Encore, but when
you do use it, you'll be so in love with
| | 00:08 | Encore for having this amazing feature.
| | 00:10 | I have this menu here. I like this menu.
| | 00:13 | But let's say I wanted to
swap it out for something else.
| | 00:15 | Now I put a lot of effort into this menu.
| | 00:17 | I've created buttons.
| | 00:18 | I have links to all these different
timelines, for all of these different
| | 00:22 | buttons, and everything's set
up exactly the way I wanted.
| | 00:25 | But what if I decide to go with a
different motif, and to change the buttons,
| | 00:29 | and to change the
background, the whole entire theme?
| | 00:31 | Well, the work is not in vain because
Encore can actually go and swap out the
| | 00:38 | existing menu for a new menu.
| | 00:41 | Let me show you what I'm talking about here.
| | 00:41 | I'm going to go to the Library panel.
| | 00:43 | I'm going to change this Set to Travel.
| | 00:47 | Let's say, for example, I
see this Beach menu WIDE menu.
| | 00:51 | I'm thinking oh, man!
| | 00:53 | That would go with my theme of Explore
California so much better. I love it!
| | 00:57 | I want it! I need it!
| | 00:58 | So what I can do is select the menu
in the Project panel, select the Beach
| | 01:02 | menu WIDE here in the Library panel
and click this button, which is Replace,
| | 01:07 | second from the left.
| | 01:09 | I click that button.
| | 01:11 | Momentarily, I now have a new menu.
| | 01:15 | The Play All even has the thumbnail set up.
| | 01:17 | I have a Play All button still.
| | 01:19 | I have the Olive Oil Movies
button still, and the Ocean Movies.
| | 01:23 | If I click these buttons and look
at them in the Properties panel, and
| | 01:28 | actually the Link has not been set for these,
but all of my other links work out just fine.
| | 01:33 | So I can click on the Olive Oil
Movies, and now continue to link up.
| | 01:37 | But the Play All link that
was created is still all set up.
| | 01:41 | The buttons have the same names and everything.
| | 01:43 | So I just swapped out the background,
and the look and the style of the buttons,
| | 01:49 | but the core of my navigation remains intact.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a chapter index| 00:00 | We've talked before about adding
chapter markers to your timeline.
| | 00:03 | We've also talked before about
submenus and how we use them to play these
| | 00:08 | different chapter markers.
| | 00:09 | We've also linked these up together.
| | 00:11 | But what happens when you have tons
of chapter markers, as we do in this
| | 00:17 | 6-minute movie here?
| | 00:18 | This is actually only 13.
| | 00:19 | For a full-length movie, you
might have even more than that.
| | 00:22 | But what happens when we create these submenus?
| | 00:25 | Here we only have four buttons.
| | 00:26 | So if we have dozens of these chapter
markers to link up to these little video
| | 00:31 | buttons here, this is going to take a long time.
| | 00:34 | Encore realizes this and
has pity upon our poor souls.
| | 00:38 | It's created a feature that allows us to
create one link between a timeline and a submenu.
| | 00:44 | Then Encore will do the rest automatically.
| | 00:47 | What I'm going to do is drag and
drop this first chapter marker to the
| | 00:53 | first video button here.
| | 00:55 | That's all I've done.
| | 00:56 | That's the only link between this
timeline and this submenu, and there are no
| | 01:00 | other menus in our project, but watch this!
| | 01:04 | I select the timeline here.
| | 01:06 | Now I'm going to go to the Menu here.
| | 01:08 | That's where we need to go.
| | 01:09 | Actually, if I go here and I select my
timeline, and then go back to the Menu
| | 01:14 | menu, you see that it's still grayed out here.
| | 01:16 | So what I need to do is select the
menu in the Project panel, then go to the
| | 01:21 | Menu menu at the top of the interface.
| | 01:24 | Then what I want to do
is create a chapter index.
| | 01:27 | Go ahead and click that button.
| | 01:31 | Miraculously, what Encore will do is
it will put in the remaining chapter
| | 01:37 | markers into these buttons.
| | 01:40 | You notice that we had way
more chapter markers than buttons.
| | 01:43 | So what Encore did for us is to create
new menus and put these markers in these
| | 01:51 | submenus for us automatically.
| | 01:53 | Absolutely miraculous! Even look at this!
| | 01:56 | If I go and select these navigational
buttons, and actually what these are for
| | 02:00 | us is for navigating between submenus.
| | 02:03 | So we have the Main menu button here.
It takes us to the Main menu. Then we have
| | 02:06 | these arrows that take us to the
previous submenu and to the next submenu.
| | 02:10 | The links for both of these
have already been all set up.
| | 02:13 | So, all of these menus are
already connected to one another.
| | 02:17 | All of our chapter
markers are there automatically.
| | 02:21 | That, my friends, is a time saving feature.
| | 02:25 | So again, we select the menu, go
to the Menu menu and choose Create
| | 02:30 | Chapter Index.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using photos as subpictures| 00:00 | This next tutorial is a great trick,
just a phenomenal tool to be able to
| | 00:05 | have in your arsenal.
| | 00:07 | It is very challenging, probably the most
challenging in the training series, but man!
| | 00:12 | What a great secret trick.
| | 00:13 | If I was a magician, they would have to
kill me for sharing this with you.
| | 00:15 | But what we're going to do is we're
going to have a workaround for Subpictures.
| | 00:20 | Subpictures, to me look, so cheesy,
just these little graphic overlays,
| | 00:24 | over buttons, and they always look
kind of blocky and kind of chintzy.
| | 00:27 | So what we're going to do is we're going to
make it so that I, this is me right here,
| | 00:33 | I am going to be the Subpicture.
| | 00:35 | And I'm going to point at the activated button.
| | 00:38 | The way that we're going to fake this
is that we're going to actually have four
| | 00:43 | separate menus here that appear
to the audience to be one menu.
| | 00:48 | So we have one menu where I'm pointing
to button 1, one menu where I'm pointing
| | 00:53 | to button 2, one to
button 3, and one to button 4.
| | 00:58 | These are four separate menus again,
but we're going to use a feature called
| | 01:01 | Auto Activate, which will make the
audience think that this is one menu.
| | 01:06 | Now, I've already set up
menus 2, 3, and 4 for you.
| | 01:09 | So let's go ahead and double-
click on menu number 1 to set this up.
| | 01:13 | Now, when users choose button number 2,
when they select it with their DVD remote, not
| | 01:20 | necessarily when they choose it as far
as like pressing Enter, but just when
| | 01:25 | they select it, we want it to go to the
number 2 menu automatically without them
| | 01:32 | pushing a button, because if they have
to push a button, then the mystery is up.
| | 01:35 | So what we want to do is use this
feature in the Properties panel with the
| | 01:38 | Button selected called Auto Activate.
| | 01:41 | So that means that as soon as
users choose this button, it will
| | 01:46 | automatically activate the link.
| | 01:49 | So we want the link to be menu number 2.
| | 01:53 | So what we're going to do is choose
the link, and we're going to go to
| | 01:58 | number 2-Upper Right menu.
| | 02:00 | And when we make our link from the
flyout menu, we cannot only choose the menu
| | 02:05 | to link to, but which button is active.
| | 02:07 | So when users choose button number 2,
we will have the number 2 button active.
| | 02:13 | Likewise, when users choose button
number 4, then we will Auto Activate button 4.
| | 02:20 | And from the flyout menu, we will
choose menu number 4, and button number 4 of
| | 02:25 | menu number 4, and likewise with number 3.
| | 02:27 | We'll Auto Activate that.
| | 02:30 | From the Link flyout, we'll choose the third
menu and the number 3 button of the third menu.
| | 02:37 | So as it mixes what's going on here as
the users choose button number 2, for
| | 02:41 | example, or as they just move their cursor to
button number 2, then we go to the number 2 menu.
| | 02:48 | If they then push down on their remote
control, it will instantly, automatically
| | 02:53 | because of this Auto Activate thing,
| | 02:54 | they'll automatically be taken to the
fourth menu, the 4-Lower Right menu.
| | 03:00 | Now, you might be asking to yourself,
how would they actually link to the object
| | 03:03 | to watch a movie then?
| | 03:05 | Well, if you are on menu number 4, for
example, then menu number 4, this button
| | 03:11 | would be activated, and then you
could set this link to whatever object.
| | 03:14 | So each button would only have one real
link to another object in your project.
| | 03:21 | So again, number 1, here is the real button.
| | 03:24 | As they selected number 2, they're
automatically be taken to this menu, 3,
| | 03:28 | they're automatically be taken to that menu,
4, automatically be taken to this menu.
| | 03:33 | So it would appear to them as if they
are just kind of browsing around, and
| | 03:39 | as if I am moving according to their
choices, but really this is four separate menus.
| | 03:44 | So let's see how this works.
| | 03:44 | I'm going to right-click on menu number 1.
| | 03:47 | That's our first play object.
| | 03:49 | I'm going to choose Preview from Here.
| | 03:51 | Now, instead of using my mouse, which
will be kind of messy in this example, I'm
| | 03:55 | going to use these arrows
here to simulate the DVD remote.
| | 03:58 | So if I click on the right to select
button number 2, it's automatically going
| | 04:03 | to switch over, because we Auto
Activated the Link to go to the Upper Right
| | 04:07 | menu, it's automatically now in menu number 2.
| | 04:11 | I push down to go to button number 4,
and I'm actually in menu number 4.
| | 04:14 | So it appears to the viewer as if we are
controlling the actual menu itself, but
| | 04:22 | really, I am as if the Subpicture,
I'm pretending to be the Subpicture.
| | 04:26 | I'm not really the Subpicture, but it
appears that way because of Auto Activate,
| | 04:31 | because we have made it so that
each of these buttons now takes you
| | 04:35 | automatically to another menu.
| | 04:38 | Now, for my money, this is the best use
of Auto Activate, but you could use Auto
| | 04:43 | Activate for other purposes.
| | 04:44 | If somebody selects a button,
| | 04:45 | you want it to automatically
play a Slideshow or Timeline,
| | 04:48 | you can do that, of course, as well.
| | 04:49 | But by auto-activating and switching out
the menus with another menu, you can do
| | 04:54 | really crazy, creative,
innovative things like this.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
14. Advanced Creative TricksCreating "Easter eggs"| 00:00 | In this chapter, we are going to be
looking at some super sweet creative tricks
| | 00:04 | to help you spark your creativity and also
to help take your projects to the next level.
| | 00:09 | The first one we are going to look
at is the ever-popular Easter Egg.
| | 00:12 | In Easter, there are these eggs, and
usually parents hide them for their kids,
| | 00:17 | and then kids go running off and
trying to find these little Easter Eggs.
| | 00:20 | So on DVD menus, often times
there are these hidden Easter Eggs.
| | 00:25 | There are these little secret
buttons that many people don't know about.
| | 00:29 | If you could find them, then they often are
buttons that will take you to secret content.
| | 00:34 | If you're unaware of this, I invite
you to do a Google search because it's
| | 00:37 | amazing how many Hollywood DVDs that
you probably have in your collection,
| | 00:42 | you aren't even aware of it, have these
Easter Eggs, little secret content all
| | 00:46 | over the place, everything from The
Lord of the Rings movies to Spiderman and
| | 00:50 | everything in between.
| | 00:51 | Now, to set this up what I did is I
went over into Photoshop, and what I did is
| | 00:56 | I created a new buttons set.
| | 00:58 | We will talk about how to do that later on
when we talk about creating menus in Photoshop.
| | 01:02 | I created this text as a Subpicture Highlight.
| | 01:05 | So essentially, it is a
button with nothing visible.
| | 01:08 | So then when I import this as a
menu, you can't see this button.
| | 01:12 | These are the only three buttons that
are here: Play All, Scenes and Set Up.
| | 01:15 | So if you were on the Setup button, you
wouldn't normally think to push to the
| | 01:20 | right, and yet that's the only way
that you can get to my secret button.
| | 01:25 | So when users are on the Setup button,
and they push to the right, then they
| | 01:29 | find my secret stash.
| | 01:31 | So I right-click on this menu, choose
Preview from Here and so then we could use
| | 01:35 | these Arrows down here to click right,
and right, go to my button, and then if I
| | 01:41 | know the secret stash, or I am
feeling adventurous, I push right again.
| | 01:44 | There is the secret.
| | 01:46 | All that we are seeing here
is the Subpicture Highlight.
| | 01:50 | So it doesn't show up.
| | 01:52 | As we see, as we click over here, and
there is nothing to see, but we can click
| | 01:56 | and get the bounding box, the outline of a button,
and we can see that it is, in fact, a button.
| | 02:01 | Here in the Properties panel we could
set a link for it, to link to secret
| | 02:03 | content, or what have you.
| | 02:05 | Believe it or not, Easter Eggs are
probably the most common of the creative
| | 02:09 | tricks in the DVD authoring world.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Making games| 00:00 | Another interesting trick you can do
with DVDs is to create little games.
| | 00:03 | You are not going to be able
to make like Super Mario Brothers
| | 00:05 | or something, but you can create some
basic, simple word games, and things where
| | 00:10 | there are puzzles or allow people choices.
| | 00:12 | So, for example, here I have this
menu, What is the airspeed velocity of
| | 00:16 | an Unladen Swallow?
| | 00:17 | We have a few answers here, 10
Meters/Second is the correct answer.
| | 00:22 | And so I actually have separate menus here.
| | 00:24 | I have a Correct menu, and I have a Wrong menu.
| | 00:27 | So really this is a function of menus.
| | 00:29 | Again, we see that menus are the core
of what we do in Encore, even if we are
| | 00:33 | just playing around with DVD games.
| | 00:35 | So I'm going to select African or
European. That is an incorrect answer.
| | 00:40 | I am going to select the Wrong menu here.
| | 00:42 | I am going to link this button to that.
| | 00:43 | B. Really Fast is also a wrong answer, so I am
going to link this button to the Wrong Answer.
| | 00:49 | 10 Meters/Second is correct.
| | 00:51 | So I am going to link this to the Correct menu.
| | 00:54 | And what is Airspeed is also incorrect, so I
am going to link this also to the Wrong menu.
| | 00:59 | Now, let's go ahead and select the
Question menu, right-click on it, and
| | 01:03 | choose Preview from Here.
| | 01:05 | So we have our menu, now let's go
ahead and choose this incorrect answer,
| | 01:08 | African or European.
| | 01:10 | We failed, so now we click Try Again, and
we didn't link this up to our original menu.
| | 01:16 | So what we need to do is go to our
Wrong menu, click on Try Again, link this
| | 01:21 | back to the question here.
| | 01:23 | Now, I can right-click on Question >
Preview from Here, and we will try Really
| | 01:27 | Fast this time, Fail, click on
Try Again, and we get more chances.
| | 01:31 | When we finally do get the right
answer, we go to Correct! Good Job!
| | 01:35 | And then do Next Question.
| | 01:37 | So then we could link to a different
menu and keep traveling down this path.
| | 01:42 | So let's say on a DVD you had some trivia.
| | 01:45 | You could make it so that in order to
get the big prize at the end, maybe some
| | 01:49 | extra bonus footage or something like that,
| | 01:51 | they have to answer all the
questions correctly eventually to get there.
| | 01:55 | I might recommend that if you did
create an elaborate game that use the flow
| | 01:59 | chart to determine where people are
going to go, with what answerers, and what's
| | 02:03 | going to lead them where.
| | 02:06 | So again, while this is not a Nintendo
game, there is some opportunity here to
| | 02:10 | create some creative strategy-type games.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using menu transitions| 00:00 | I have here this simple project
with this menu from Encore's Library.
| | 00:04 | I have this Play Movie button set up
to play my Timeline, which is this cool
| | 00:08 | snowboarding movie here.
| | 00:10 | You could see a little preview
of that in the Project panel.
| | 00:12 | Now, wouldn't it be cool if when we
clicked Play Movie as a user, it didn't
| | 00:17 | just go from the menu straight to the
Timeline, but if there was a cool little animation?
| | 00:22 | What that little cool animation
is called is a menu Transition.
| | 00:26 | So what I have done is I have created this menu.
| | 00:28 | I have taken the menu actually and
taken it into Adobe After Effects, and I've
| | 00:33 | applied this cool Shatter Effect.
| | 00:34 | You could see preview of that here in
the Project panel, it kind of explodes.
| | 00:38 | What we are going to do is we are
going to set this up as a transition,
| | 00:40 | so that when users click on Play Movie,
the menu will appear to explode, and
| | 00:46 | then the Timeline will play.
| | 00:48 | The way that we set this up is that we
click the button, go to the Properties
| | 00:51 | panel, then we go to the Transition tab.
| | 00:53 | Transitions are functions of buttons,
so each button could have its own unique
| | 00:57 | transition if you want.
| | 00:58 | So I am going to go to the pick whip, in
Asset here, and drag the pick whip over
| | 01:03 | to the Texture menu movie that I have created.
| | 01:07 | Now, let's right-click on the
Texture menu and choose Preview from Here.
| | 01:11 | Now, assuming we set this up right,
once we clicked Play Movie, it's going to
| | 01:15 | play the transition movie of the menu
Exploding, and then it's going to play
| | 01:20 | the Timeline movie.
| | 01:25 | Isn't that fun, just to
have like a little transition?
| | 01:28 | It doesn't just go straight to
the footage, it actually blows up.
| | 01:31 | By the way, if you are interested in
creating that Shatter Effect, you can check
| | 01:34 | out the Shatter Tutorials on lynda.com.
| | 01:37 | I've done a lot of the After Effects
Training on there, and there is plenty of
| | 01:40 | training on the Shatter Effect.
| | 01:41 | It's very easy, basically a drag and
drop thing that makes that explode, very
| | 01:45 | quick and easy to do.
| | 01:46 | That's really all there is
to creating menu transitions.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using subpictures as art| 00:00 | In this movie, we are going to look
a little bit closer at Subpictures.
| | 00:04 | Specifically, we are going to look at
how to maybe use then in creative ways.
| | 00:09 | I have here this menu, and I have Stars
as a button and Lightning as a button.
| | 00:15 | The Subpicture Highlights for
these buttons are very unique.
| | 00:19 | I am going to go ahead and select this menu,
click the Preview button to preview this.
| | 00:24 | Look at the Subpicture Highlights for Lightning.
| | 00:26 | There are three colors, including these
duotone lightning bolts, and look at the stars.
| | 00:31 | They are all over the place.
| | 00:33 | Now, while it is common and standard
to have Subpicture Highlights, they are
| | 00:37 | just kind of like little icon
next to your button selection,
| | 00:40 | it is possible to do whatever you
want with those Subpicture Highlights.
| | 00:44 | As indicated here with the Stars, we
could make it, so that when you choose that
| | 00:48 | option, there's stuff that
happens all over the screen.
| | 00:51 | It doesn't matter where you
put the Subpicture Highlights.
| | 00:53 | It is just something that highlights
somewhere on the screen when your users
| | 00:58 | choose that option, or simply have it selected.
| | 01:01 | We've also discussed, but never really
looked at an example of using the three
| | 01:06 | Subpicture Highlight colors.
| | 01:07 | You can have up to three
in one Subpicture Highlight.
| | 01:10 | So sometimes that might look like a
circle with little highlight on it, or
| | 01:13 | something like that.
| | 01:14 | But here we have three colors.
| | 01:15 | We have white, yellow, and orange.
| | 01:17 | So let's look a little
closer at what I did here.
| | 01:20 | I am going to select this menu in the
Menu Viewer and go to the Layers panel.
| | 01:26 | As we talked about, and as we'll talk
about much more later when we get into
| | 01:30 | Photoshop and building
stuff from scratch in Photoshop,
| | 01:32 | buttons in Encore are just made up of
layers grouped together in a folder in Photoshop.
| | 01:39 | So the Stars button contains the
Stars text, and then we have the little
| | 01:45 | Highlight, and then we have many,
many, many, many little stars here.
| | 01:50 | So you could have as many of
these highlights as you want.
| | 01:54 | The little =3 in parentheses tells
Encore that this is a Subpicture Highlight.
| | 01:58 | So there is really no limit there.
| | 02:00 | Now as far as the Lightning goes, I
use a little bit of a different code.
| | 02:03 | I used =1 for the components that I
wanted yellow, and =2 for the components
| | 02:09 | that I wanted orange, and =3 for
the components that I wanted white.
| | 02:13 | So again, you could have up
to three Subpicture Highlights.
| | 02:16 | These are determined in the Menu menu,
going to Edit menu Colors Set, as we talked about.
| | 02:21 | By default, it's set to Automatic.
| | 02:23 | So Encore is going to look at the
colors of the layer and determine what's the
| | 02:28 | best Subpicture Color?
| | 02:30 | It wisely estimated that yellow was my
number one, orange is my number two, and
| | 02:35 | white is my number three.
| | 02:36 | Of course, if I wanted to change this, I
could go to menu Default, and then when
| | 02:40 | I previewed this, it would look very different.
| | 02:43 | So I could change any of
these colors from this menu here.
| | 02:46 | I am actually going to take this
back to Automatic and click OK.
| | 02:49 | So basically we have three
choices with Subpicture Highlights.
| | 02:53 | We can do =1, =2 or =3, and that's for
each Subpicture Highlight, for one button.
| | 02:59 | The downside of this is
that we do get some jaggies.
| | 03:02 | It's not perfectly smooth just because
of whatever it is in the DVD system that
| | 03:07 | makes it, so that
Subpictures are a little bit blocky.
| | 03:09 | That's the way they will show
up on the user's screen as well.
| | 03:11 | But you can be more creative and
think about what we can do with
| | 03:15 | Subpicture Highlights.
| | 03:16 | They can go all over the place.
| | 03:17 | They could be multi-colors, and so maybe
there's some room for creativity there.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a video menu| 00:00 | If you have found anything to be
limiting in the way that Encore deals
| | 00:03 | with menus, or subpicture highlights, or what
have you, this video should be very freeing.
| | 00:09 | Here we're going to take the
ultimate liberty, and we're going to remove
| | 00:11 | everything from the menu and have a
video background to play, and before we've
| | 00:17 | done this, but the buttons were still the same.
| | 00:19 | Now, we're going to even replace the
buttons, and the only thing that we're
| | 00:23 | going to have remaining from
the menu are subpicture highlights.
| | 00:26 | This, again, is very freeing.
| | 00:28 | I have here this menu, and this is the
NTSC_Scientific menu from the Corporate
| | 00:33 | set, from the Library panel.
| | 00:35 | And what I'm going to do is I'm going
to select this menu, and let me show
| | 00:39 | you what I did here.
| | 00:40 | This is kind of similar to what we
saw before, where I took an animated my
| | 00:43 | background here in After Effects,
except this time the buttons are also video
| | 00:49 | if we play this here.
| | 00:50 | You see we have the buttons kind of
having this little sheen going across
| | 00:54 | them, and the colors of the buttons
are animating over time, and so we
| | 00:58 | couldn't do this any other way.
| | 01:00 | We're actually going to completely
replace the buttons in the menu with
| | 01:05 | these fake video buttons.
| | 01:07 | So let's go ahead an Option+Drag or
Alt+Drag the Video as Menu video to the
| | 01:12 | background of the menu.
| | 01:14 | Next, we need to do a
little bit of repair work here.
| | 01:17 | We need to go to the Layers panel and
select the Menu Viewer, because what's
| | 01:20 | happening is is that the
menu is overlaying the video.
| | 01:25 | So we're getting two buttons here.
| | 01:27 | So what I need to do is take off the
visibility of volume 1 and the button background.
| | 01:33 | Open up volume 2, do the same thing.
| | 01:36 | Open of volume 3 and do the same thing.
| | 01:38 | And actually, we don't even
need the corporatecorp inc.
| | 01:41 | text because that text is
already part of our video.
| | 01:45 | We can also remove the haze layer
here, and now we're back to square one.
| | 01:50 | Now, you might be asking, if we
remove the visibility of everything in
| | 01:54 | the entire menu except this video
Background, then how will users know what to click?
| | 01:59 | Ah! Here is the magic.
| | 02:01 | In order for a button to be a
button, it really just needs a
| | 02:05 | subpicture highlight.
| | 02:07 | That is the basic component of a button.
| | 02:09 | So as long as it as a subpicture
highlight, then users know where to click.
| | 02:12 | So if our video had these moving
blobs, or whatever, as long as there's a
| | 02:17 | subpicture highlight letting viewers know which
one was selected, that's really all that you need.
| | 02:22 | So now what I can do is click this
Preview button, and you can see that our
| | 02:27 | video is moving, and we still
have the subpicture highlights.
| | 02:30 | And really, the subpicture highlight is the
only thing carried over from the original menu.
| | 02:36 | But that's really all you need, and
these are fully functioning buttons.
| | 02:40 | Everything else is total video.
| | 02:42 | And so it really frees you.
| | 02:45 | Maybe you're doing a DVD for an
air show or something like that.
| | 02:48 | You might have a button that's like a
propeller that occasionally spins around,
| | 02:51 | as long as there's a subpicture
highlight that maybe could highlight in the
| | 02:54 | center of the propeller or something
like that, that's really all you need.
| | 02:57 | So this trick, again, is very
freeing and gives you a lot of control over
| | 03:03 | that menu.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
15. Using Encore as a Presentation ToolWhy use Encore as a presentation tool?| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to look at using
Encore as a presentation tool. But why Encore?
| | 00:05 | Well, what one of the reasons for this
is that there is far more interactivity
| | 00:08 | in a DVD than in just plain
video as if with slideshows.
| | 00:12 | It's also way easier to program than Flash is.
| | 00:17 | And it has all that same
interactivity that you crave.
| | 00:20 | And because it's on DVD, the
presentation medium also allows for
| | 00:24 | content distribution.
| | 00:26 | So if you have files that you would
like to send home with the members of the
| | 00:28 | meeting, you can do that as well.
| | 00:31 | So let's get into talking about
using Encore as a means for presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating slideshows with manual advance| 00:00 | Let's say you had a presentation to
give and you decide to use Encore to burn
| | 00:04 | a DVD to guide you as you are
presenting, to be your teaching tool, and you
| | 00:11 | have a slideshow here.
| | 00:12 | And let's say you have these different
slides of a model presenting the progress
| | 00:17 | of certain locales of your company,
namely Dallas, London and Denver.
| | 00:22 | So she is kind of going
through the motions here.
| | 00:24 | And what we might want to do is talk
about the first slide and talk about, okay.
| | 00:28 | Well, this is how London and Dallas are doing.
| | 00:30 | And now let's move on to talk about
these stats, and now let's move on to
| | 00:34 | talk about those stats.
| | 00:35 | And you may want to pause for a question.
| | 00:36 | And so the way we've done things in the
past with slideshows probably wouldn't
| | 00:40 | work too much, because we might have
slide duration, but the slide duration is
| | 00:44 | even like 20 seconds long, people might
have questions and so you might not want
| | 00:49 | to move on just yet.
| | 00:50 | So what you can do is select a
slideshow and when you have the Slideshow
| | 00:54 | Properties in the Properties panel, you can
check this option, which is Manual Advance.
| | 01:00 | And what this allows you to do is to
control when you go to the next slide.
| | 01:05 | It basically makes slide duration invalid.
| | 01:08 | So as you are presenting that, the way
that you would go from slide to slide is
| | 01:12 | by using the right arrows or the
next button on your DVD remote.
| | 01:17 | Now, I didn't mention this feature back
when we were talking about slideshows,
| | 01:20 | because most of time you don't want to
do that to viewers, because that's kind
| | 01:23 | of torturous to have to do that
for all these different slides.
| | 01:26 | But if you are presenting something on
a DVD, then the ability to control when
| | 01:32 | you go from slide to
slide is very helpful, indeed.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating captions on slides| 00:00 | Now it's not instantly clear,
initially, how to add captions to slides, but
| | 00:05 | you absolutely can.
| | 00:06 | If you go ahead and select the Type tool
and try to start typing, you won't be able
| | 00:09 | to though because it's a little quirky.
| | 00:11 | I'm going to select this third slide,
and I'm going to resize my panels here, so
| | 00:18 | I could see more options.
| | 00:20 | And with this slide selected, you
can see that we have this option that
| | 00:23 | says Create Subtitle.
| | 00:25 | And if we enable that, then it will
allow us to create a subtitle, and we can
| | 00:29 | choose whether the subtitle contains
the name and/or the description, which we
| | 00:34 | could find right here at the
top of the Properties panel.
| | 00:37 | In this case, I'm going to type in the
Description field, Sales for March - May,
| | 00:44 | and click outside of that to accept it.
| | 00:47 | And then I'm going to
uncheck Name and check Description.
| | 00:51 | And now, as you can see, we
have a caption for this slide.
| | 00:54 | So if we want to add some
description here, we definitely can do that.
| | 00:58 | We can also adjust some color options,
such as the Highlight group and the Stroke.
| | 01:03 | We can also adjust the Alignment.
| | 01:04 | Right now, it's 100% from top, but
we can take this to let's say 10%.
| | 01:11 | And this now goes to the top of the screen.
| | 01:14 | Again, it's kind of a weird
parameter, but it's basically meaning the
| | 01:17 | distance from the top.
| | 01:18 | So 10%, not very far from the top.
| | 01:20 | 100%, very far away from the top.
| | 01:23 | So if captions on your slides will help
your presentation, that is how you do it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding data content to discs| 00:00 | So let's say you've delivered your
presentation that you made in Encore.
| | 00:04 | People are just eating it up,
and they want more information.
| | 00:07 | They want the PDFs that you've made.
| | 00:09 | They want the research you've done,
maybe extra files and videos and assets and
| | 00:13 | resources that you have,
but they won't work on a DVD.
| | 00:16 | For example, you can't
have a PDF displayed on a DVD.
| | 00:19 | So what you can do is burn this content,
whatever extra content you have, you
| | 00:24 | could burn it on the DVD as data.
| | 00:28 | This is done by going to the Build panel,
| | 00:31 | the same panel that we'll be using
later on to actually burn our disc.
| | 00:34 | If you scroll down a little bit, in
the Disc Info area, this is where you're
| | 00:39 | allowed to put on DVD-ROM
content, in other words data content.
| | 00:44 | So what we would do then
is click the Browse button.
| | 00:46 | We would navigate to our
folder on our hard drive.
| | 00:49 | Now, it would have be a folder. We can't
just pick and choose individual files.
| | 00:53 | Encore will not let you do that.
| | 00:55 | You just select a single folder, and
then Encore will use that and burn to the
| | 00:59 | disc again as data content.
| | 01:02 | And the way that works is that people
can still play your presentation as video,
| | 01:06 | like in a regular old DVD player,
| | 01:08 | but then when they put it into your
computer, they will be able to play it as
| | 01:11 | video, and they'll will also be not
be able to access the data content,
| | 01:15 | so whatever's in that folder that
you've added, if it's a PDF file or extra
| | 01:18 | videos or whatever it is.
| | 01:20 | You might not use DVD-ROM content in all
of your projects and maybe very rarely.
| | 01:27 | Qhen you do need it and you have that
ability to pass off data content, as well
| | 01:31 | as video content, it's very
powerful and often very helpful.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
16. Creating Menus from Scratch in PhotoshopMaking menus in Photoshop| 00:00 | As we've lightly touched on previously
in this training series, Encore menus are
| | 00:04 | really nothing more or less
than just Photoshop files.
| | 00:07 | So in this chapter, we're going to break
it down and see how to create menus from
| | 00:12 | scratch in Photoshop.
| | 00:14 | Let's go ahead and dissect one of the
menus that comes with Encore and see what
| | 00:18 | it's made of in Photoshop.
| | 00:19 | I'm using the Entertainment menu, found
in the General Set in the Library panel.
| | 00:23 | I'm going to select this menu and click
this handy button that I use very often,
| | 00:28 | Edit menu in Photoshop.
| | 00:31 | If you see this warning, it's nothing
you can do or change, so don't even worry
| | 00:35 | about it, just go ahead and click OK.
| | 00:37 | And here we have our Encore menu in Photoshop.
| | 00:40 | If Photoshop was not open,
Encore will even launch it for you.
| | 00:44 | Now, here's the way this works.
| | 00:45 | Let's go over to the Layers panel.
| | 00:46 | If it's not showing, you go to the
Window menu and choose Layers, but this is
| | 00:51 | where we could really, again,
dissect and take apart this menu.
| | 00:55 | Now a lot of the magic that happens with
menus is actually just done in the background.
| | 01:00 | It's just the design.
| | 01:01 | So if I took off eye icon for this
beautiful background, this is what we're left with.
| | 01:06 | It's not unbelievable without this
beautiful background. That really makes it.
| | 01:09 | So again, knowing Photoshop, knowing
how to design, that really is the one of
| | 01:14 | the great keys to designing a successful
project, or at least a successful menu, in Encore.
| | 01:20 | Really what's going on here are these
folders, and when you see this little Plus,
| | 01:26 | this is an indication that
this is, in fact, a button.
| | 01:29 | This really is what makes
this Photoshop document a menu.
| | 01:34 | In the next movie, we're going to go
from scratch and create a button using all
| | 01:38 | the codes and the elements just from scratch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The button set codes| 00:00 | So in this first step, we're going
to create the most basic of all Encore
| | 00:04 | elements, and that is a button set.
| | 00:07 | So, here we have the Play All button,
and the Scenes button, and we have the
| | 00:12 | elements for the Set Up
button, but it's not a button.
| | 00:16 | We have some set up text, and we have a
cloud shape, which is just going to be a
| | 00:20 | graphic representation of our button,
just decoration basically, and then we
| | 00:24 | have the Sun copy layer here that's
going to be our subpicture highlight.
| | 00:27 | So what we do to make this a
button is that we create a folder.
| | 00:32 | So, I'm going to go down here to the
bottom of the Layers panel, click a Folder
| | 00:34 | icon, our Layer Group icon, and then
I'm going to drag these elements, all of
| | 00:39 | them into the same folder.
| | 00:41 | Let's go ahead and click this triangle
here, close up that group, make sure it's
| | 00:46 | all nice and contained there, looking good.
| | 00:48 | Now, just because they are in
the folder doesn't mean anything.
| | 00:51 | We have to name this properly.
| | 00:53 | So what I'm going to do is double-click
on this layer until I get the highlight
| | 00:57 | field, and I can type in it.
| | 00:58 | I'm going to create an open parenthesis, and then
click the Plus sign and then a close parenthesis.
| | 01:04 | I'll go ahead and call this button Set Up.
| | 01:07 | That's not really critical, but what is
critical is the little code, that little
| | 01:10 | Plus sign in parentheses. That is critical.
| | 01:13 | That is what tells Encore that this is a button.
| | 01:18 | Now, when I first heard of Encore
several years ago, this whole idea of button
| | 01:22 | codes and all those different little
things that you could put in there was a
| | 01:26 | little confusing to me, but if you
did that, if you just made a folder and
| | 01:30 | drag this junk into the folder and put
the Plus sign in parentheses, you just
| | 01:33 | made your first button. You did it.
| | 01:35 | So it's not super overwhelming, and
again, we're going to keep adding to this
| | 01:38 | throughout this chapter as we go.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The subpicture highlight codes| 00:00 | Our next step is to
create a subpicture highlight.
| | 00:03 | Now, if we open up the Set Up button that
we just made, we have the elements for this.
| | 00:07 | I have the text here, and I have the
cloud shape, but really, what's going to be
| | 00:10 | the subpicture highlight is this Sun copy.
| | 00:13 | So what I'm going to do is double-
click the name Sun copy. Make sure it's not
| | 00:18 | this object and make sure it's not this fx icon.
| | 00:20 | It has to be on that text.
| | 00:22 | And then again, before the text,
everything that we do is going to be in
| | 00:27 | parentheses, and it has to be
before the name of the layer or group.
| | 00:31 | That's how Encore recognizes it.
| | 00:33 | So again, before the word Sun, we're
going to, in parenthesis, type =1, and
| | 00:37 | then close parenthesis. That's it.
| | 00:40 | That tells Encore that this
is a subpicture highlight.
| | 00:43 | And again, as mentioned, there are three
different groups, so this could be =1, =2, or =3.
| | 00:50 | The other buttons in our scene use =1.
| | 00:53 | So we're going to go ahead and leave
that as =1, so that the subpicture
| | 00:56 | highlight colors all match up.
| | 00:59 | And folks, as far as buttons go, that is it.
| | 01:02 | We did everything that we need to.
| | 01:03 | We have this little Plus in parentheses, and this
=1 in parentheses, so we have a subpicture highlight,
| | 01:08 | and we have a button group.
| | 01:10 | We have a button, so good job.
| | 01:13 | Now, it's actually going to get
juicier as we look at several more
| | 01:16 | interesting codes coming up.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The replacement layer code| 00:00 | Now we're going to look at the
code for creating a Replacement layer.
| | 00:03 | Now this layer here is the
ship here called Replacement.
| | 00:07 | I'm going to go ahead and
click this arrow to open it up.
| | 00:09 | We got a few effects here, a few things going on.
| | 00:11 | Just so we could see this a little
bit more clearly, I'm going to hold the
| | 00:14 | Option key on the Mac, Alt key on
the PC and click the eye icon next to
| | 00:18 | the Replacement layer.
| | 00:19 | So we could just solo this layer and get
rid of all the other pretty junk around it.
| | 00:24 | And basically, we have
this Gradient Overlay Effect.
| | 00:27 | So if I click the eye icon for the
effects here, I can see this is what the
| | 00:30 | original layer looked like.
This original layer had a mask.
| | 00:34 | And that's the original layer. Shift+
Click again to see with the layer mask.
| | 00:39 | Click the eye icon or where the eye icon
used to be see to see the effects back on.
| | 00:44 | So we have this gradient coloring.
| | 00:46 | So it's kind of giving
it this like sunset look.
| | 00:49 | We also have this kind of painterly,
sparkly mask around the outside edges.
| | 00:53 | And this is what we want to carry over
into Encore so we can replace this image
| | 00:58 | of a ferry with something a
little bit more attractive later on.
| | 01:02 | So, I'm going to hold the Option or
Alt key and click that eye icon again.
| | 01:06 | This time let's go ahead and double-
click in the name of the layer, go to the
| | 01:09 | beginning of the name of the layer and
in parentheses, just put an exclamation
| | 01:12 | point, and that is it.
| | 01:15 | That's all it takes to
create a Replacement layer.
| | 01:17 | Now, let's do Ctrl+Shift+S on the PC
or Command+Shift+S on the Mac, and do a
| | 01:23 | Save As, and I'm going to just type
this as Replacement Layer FINAL, and I am
| | 01:29 | going to save this in the PSD folder, inside
the Media files that come with the training.
| | 01:33 | I'm going to go ahead and click Save there.
| | 01:35 | Go ahead and click OK on Maximize Compatibility.
| | 01:37 | Next, I'm going to hop on over to
Encore, right-click in the Project panel,
| | 01:41 | choose Import As > Menu, go to the PSD
files here, and find the Replacement
| | 01:47 | layer FINAL menu here, click on Open,
and if we select this menu in the Menu
| | 01:52 | Viewer, actually I have the Type tool
selected, I got to hit Escape here to
| | 01:55 | cancel out of that.
| | 01:56 | But if we have the Menu Viewer
selected, go to the Layers panel.
| | 02:00 | We could see that we actually
have now a Replacement layer.
| | 02:03 | We are not seeing the cool
icon that we normally see.
| | 02:05 | We're just seeing the Replacement layer
icon here in the Layers panel. It worked.
| | 02:10 | So now I'm going to take this other
image that I have, the beach_houses here,
| | 02:14 | and you could see the coloration is
complete different, the size is fullscreen.
| | 02:18 | Let's go ahead and drag and drop the
beach_houses image onto the ship here, and
| | 02:23 | once we let go, we could see that our
beautiful, painterly, sparkly mask held
| | 02:29 | over, as well as did our color scheme.
| | 02:32 | So, mission accomplished.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The video button code| 00:00 | In this movie, we're going to look
at the code to create a video button.
| | 00:03 | So I've created a few layers here.
| | 00:04 | We have the text, we have the bar
underneath the text, and we have the actual
| | 00:08 | video button itself.
| | 00:10 | Now the code for the video button is simple.
| | 00:12 | I'm just going to click in the video
button layer here and again, the cursor
| | 00:15 | needs to be before the text and in
parentheses, I'm going to just type the
| | 00:20 | percent sign, and that's it and click
away and just a percent sign before the
| | 00:25 | name of the layer, and that's all you need.
| | 00:27 | However, you do need to have
this as a layer in a button set.
| | 00:32 | So, let's go ahead and click on the
Folder icon to create a group, and drag
| | 00:36 | our layers into said folder, and let's
go ahead and double-click on the Group
| | 00:42 | and before the name of the Group, let's
go ahead and put Plus sign in parentheses, making this
| | 00:47 | an official button.
| | 00:48 | Now we can close up this folder and
press Command+Shift+S or Ctrl+Shift+S on the
| | 00:53 | PC to do a Save As in the
PSD files and the Media files.
| | 00:57 | We'll go ahead and save this as Video
Button FINAL, Maximize Compatibility, hop
| | 01:03 | on over to Encore and here in Encore,
waiting for us is a timeline with a chapter
| | 01:09 | marker with the Video Button Code project.
| | 01:12 | Let's go ahead and right-click in the
Project panel and choose Import As > Menu,
| | 01:16 | and we'll choose the Video Button FINAL
file that we just saved from Photoshop.
| | 01:21 | Now, instantly we can tell that we did
this right because the black object that
| | 01:25 | we created and used as our video
button here is automatically gray, indicating
| | 01:31 | that it is, in fact, a
video button. We did it right.
| | 01:33 | So, drag that number two chapter
marker here to the Video Button and bada
| | 01:38 | bing, there is our video button.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The submenu navigation codes| 00:00 | Now, we're going to take a very brief
look at the codes used for submenus.
| | 00:04 | So I have this Skiing Submenu from
the Sports Set of the Library panel.
| | 00:08 | I'm going to open this up in Photoshop.
| | 00:10 | Now, you'll notice that there are
three buttons here: chapters 1, 2, and 3.
| | 00:13 | By the way, there's a little Pound sign
here, and that Pound sign indicates that
| | 00:17 | this is a button still
because we saw the plus sign.
| | 00:20 | But it's a certain type of button.
| | 00:21 | It's a chapter button.
| | 00:22 | So we have chapter 1, 2 and 3, and that
corresponds to chapters 1, 2, and 3 to buttons here.
| | 00:26 | But we also have three other button
sets, and there are actually three more
| | 00:31 | buttons here, six buttons total.
| | 00:32 | The other three buttons are one, this menu text,
| | 00:36 | this is actually a button, and
these two little arrows here.
| | 00:39 | If you click on the menu, it's
meant to take you back to the main menu.
| | 00:42 | And if you click left, it's meant to take
you to the Previous chapter selection menu.
| | 00:46 | Clicking right will take you to
the Next chapter selection menu.
| | 00:49 | And so that is what the
function of these three buttons are.
| | 00:53 | And actually, that navigation
is built into these buttons.
| | 00:57 | So I am putting the up arrow here,
which is actually Shift+6 on your keyboard,
| | 01:01 | will take you up a level.
| | 01:03 | So that's what the code for the up
to the next level menu button here is.
| | 01:07 | And the button on the left-hand side
here, for that we have the Less Than
| | 01:11 | symbol, and that will automatically take
us to the previous menu. There is one.
| | 01:14 | And if there is a Next submenu,
| | 01:16 | then this will take us to the next one,
and that is the right button here.
| | 01:20 | Now, all of these codes
are not absolutely necessary.
| | 01:23 | The chapter Pound sign here, that will
help when you're creating a chapter index.
| | 01:27 | That's necessary for that.
| | 01:28 | But again, for just like the basic
core navigation in Encore, that's not
| | 01:32 | necessary, as well as these other
submenu navigation codes, helpful but
| | 01:37 | not essential.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using pre-built menus as templates| 00:00 | And now, my dear friends, I realize
that in this chapter, I have laid a lot
| | 00:05 | of jive down upon you.
| | 00:07 | There have been a lot of little tidbits.
| | 00:09 | But I want to give you just a
little bit of a helpful hint.
| | 00:12 | One of the things that you can do is
actually start with an Encore menu, and
| | 00:17 | then open it in Photoshop.
| | 00:18 | And we can simply use this as a template.
| | 00:20 | If you're new to the button codes, if
they are intimidating, if the layout of
| | 00:24 | the menu is intimidating, we could
simply start here, and maybe we could change
| | 00:28 | the background to one of our liking.
| | 00:29 | Maybe we could change the button
background to something of our liking.
| | 00:32 | Basically, just use this, again, as a
template, as a frame of reference here.
| | 00:36 | We may want to leave the button codes intact,
for example, leave the highlights intact.
| | 00:41 | If you're feeling a little bit more
adventurous, of course, you could just open
| | 00:44 | up a Blank menu and then edit
the Blank menu in Photoshop.
| | 00:49 | And at least you'll have
the dimensions to start with.
| | 00:52 | So either way, if it helps, you can
start with one of the Encore menus, edit
| | 00:58 | those and use that as the
foundation for your own menu.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
17. About Blu-ray Discs and HD VideoIntroducing Blu-ray discs| 00:00 | In this movie, we're going to
look at what a Blu-ray disc is.
| | 00:05 | For this, we'll be using the New Project
dialog box, which you can find by going
| | 00:08 | to File > New Project.
| | 00:10 | The Authoring mode we have been
using most of the time in this training
| | 00:13 | series has been DVD.
| | 00:14 | What I want you to do is click on Blu-ray.
| | 00:17 | Again, Blu-ray is a high-definition disc format.
| | 00:21 | And it's great because it's high-
definition, and it's really big.
| | 00:24 | So you can fit way more stuff on
there, and the quality is way better.
| | 00:27 | One of the good things and one of the
bad things about Blu-ray is that there
| | 00:31 | are so many choices.
| | 00:33 | So what I would like you to do is
select Blu-ray as the Authoring mode and then
| | 00:37 | click on Default Transcode Settings.
| | 00:39 | Once we do that, then we'll see all of
the options available to us when we're
| | 00:44 | authoring Blu-ray discs.
| | 00:46 | First of all, we look at the
Maximum Audio/Video Bitrate.
| | 00:49 | The minimum is 15 bits per second,
which is a really high-quality video stream,
| | 00:56 | and this is better than what
we typically create with DVDs.
| | 00:59 | Even the minimum Blu-ray
is better than the best DVD.
| | 01:03 | And it goes all the way up
to 40 megabits per second.
| | 01:06 | If we go over to DVDs, you can see that
this only goes up to 9.4 at its highest.
| | 01:11 | So again, the quality here is unparalleled,
and it really needs to be for such a huge output.
| | 01:17 | Codec, this is interesting.
| | 01:19 | When you are creating a DVD,
you have to use MPEG-2 video.
| | 01:24 | Well, Blu-ray started out as only
having MPEG-2 video, and then about a year
| | 01:28 | after it was released, decided to
include H.264 video in its specs as well.
| | 01:35 | Now, H.264 video, it's going to make
it so it's not quite as compatible with
| | 01:40 | those people that adopted Blu-ray early on.
| | 01:42 | It got those Blu-ray players
the first year it came out or so.
| | 01:45 | But H.264 delivers about the same
quality as MPEG-2 at about half the size.
| | 01:53 | That means you could fit about twice
as much content with H.264 on a Blu-ray
| | 01:58 | disc as you can with MPEG-2.
| | 02:01 | But again, slightly less
compatible, so keep that in mind.
| | 02:03 | Now, the Dimensions are
another slightly confusing thing.
| | 02:07 | We can create a Blu-ray disc that's 720 x 480.
| | 02:10 | That's SD or standard-
definition, just like a DVD is.
| | 02:13 | But then three is multiple HD sizes,
1280 x 720, 1440 x 1080, and also full HD,
| | 02:19 | which is 1920 x 1080.
| | 02:22 | We also have many choices in Frame Rates:
| | 02:25 | 23.976 for film, also 24 for film
29.97 is the standard Frame Rate for
| | 02:31 | video, and then HD video.
| | 02:33 | especially if you want a really clear,
sharp picture, like good for sporting events
| | 02:37 | and things like that, 59.94 frames per second.
| | 02:41 | Another thing that we'll see that's
kind of fun with Blu-ray discs is that
| | 02:44 | there are special features, weird things
that Blu-ray discs can do that DVDs cannot do.
| | 02:50 | The one that we're going to look at in
the next movie is called a pop-up menu.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating Blu-ray pop-up menus| 00:00 | So let's look at Blu-ray pop-up menus.
| | 00:03 | A pop-up menu is something that is a menu.
| | 00:07 | It pops up while you are watching your content.
| | 00:10 | So let's say while you're watching a
movie, you can click the pop-up menu button
| | 00:13 | on your remote while you're watching
your Blu-ray disc, and the menu, like this,
| | 00:17 | will just pop up over the screen.
| | 00:19 | It's really convenient, because if
you're want to change the language, or change
| | 00:22 | some aspect of it, or even watch
something else, you don't have to stop watching
| | 00:26 | what you're doing and go
back to the main menu to do it.
| | 00:28 | Another cool aspect of this is that
the pop-up menus are semi-transparent.
| | 00:32 | Now, I've created this really
weak, pathetic pop-up menu here.
| | 00:36 | And it's important to know the
background is not significant.
| | 00:40 | I would love to add some pizzazz
here, as is my tendency, but it doesn't
| | 00:45 | matter because all that's left when you create
a pop-up menu and it pops-up is the buttons.
| | 00:50 | That's all that matters. The background is
irrelevant and Encore will just toss it away.
| | 00:54 | So we have our pop-up menu here.
| | 00:57 | Let's go back into
Encore and see how this works.
| | 00:59 | I'm going to right-click in the Project panel.
| | 01:01 | I'm going to import this as a menu, actually.
| | 01:04 | If we know what we're doing, we've
planned ahead, and we can just go ahead and
| | 01:07 | import it as a pop-up menu
and save ourselves some time.
| | 01:11 | But if you forget to do that, if
it's kind of a new process for you, not
| | 01:14 | figuring out what to do, I'll show you how
to convert a regular menu into a pop-up menu.
| | 01:19 | So I'm going to import this as a menu,
go to the PSD Files folder in our Media
| | 01:23 | files, and I'm going to choose
pop-up menu.psd and click Open.
| | 01:28 | You'll notice if I click on my pop-up
menu, I see the dimensions, 1280x780, also
| | 01:34 | my footage and timeline are 1280 x 720 as well.
| | 01:38 | With all those sizes going around out
there with Blu-ray, you want to make
| | 01:41 | sure that your pop-up menu and your
Timeline are going to be the same pixel dimensions.
| | 01:45 | Now, to convert this to a pop-up menu,
we need to click the menu to select it
| | 01:49 | in the Project panel.
| | 01:50 | Go to the Properties panel of the
menu, and there is a Pop-up tab.
| | 01:54 | So click on the Pop-up tab, and we could
simply just click Set as Blu-ray Pop-up menu.
| | 01:59 | And there you go.
| | 02:00 | And as mentioned, as soon as we do that,
the white background is gone, and we
| | 02:04 | can even see the semi-
transparency in these buttons.
| | 02:08 | The way that this works is that pop-up
menus need to be associated with timelines.
| | 02:14 | So we connect the pop-up menu to the
timelines because the menu goes up over the timeline,
| | 02:18 | so a rather peculiar
relationship that we don't have with DVDs.
| | 02:23 | So I'm going to go ahead and click on the
timeline in the Project panel to select it.
| | 02:26 | And then when we were looking at the
Timeline properties in the Properties
| | 02:29 | panel, we have a Set Popup Menu dropdown.
| | 02:31 | So I'm going to drop this
down and choose Pop Up Menu.
| | 02:34 | This is not typical.
| | 02:35 | It's not usually called Pop Up Menu, but I
actually called my pop-up menu Pop Up Menu.
| | 02:40 | So that's what I'm going to
choose here: Pop Up Menu.
| | 02:43 | And then, we have now associated
this pop-up menu with this Timeline.
| | 02:49 | So what's the deal?
| | 02:50 | Where is the background?
| | 02:52 | Well, previewing a pop-up menu
is a subject in and of itself.
| | 02:57 | So we'll look at that in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Previewing pop-up menus over a timeline| 00:00 | So now it's time to preview how our pop-up
menu will look over our footage when it pops up.
| | 00:06 | This is just weird.
| | 00:06 | It just doesn't work for some reason.
| | 00:08 | This is very backwards, but this is just
what you have got to do. Don't shoot me.
| | 00:12 | I am just the messenger.
| | 00:13 | Go ahead and click on the pop-up menu
in the Project panel and over in the menu
| | 00:18 | Properties, under the Pop-up tab, we can
actually associate the Pop-up menu with
| | 00:24 | multiple timelines, so what we need to
do in this dropdown now is choose the
| | 00:29 | timeline that it's associated with.
| | 00:30 | So, I am going to choose
Clip05-tahoe. There we go!
| | 00:33 | Now we could see our Pop-
up menu over our footage.
| | 00:37 | Now this is a little confusing as well, though.
| | 00:39 | Because if I go to the Monitor, the
frame that I'm on is 13 seconds and 9 frames
| | 00:43 | in, where he's kind of flying through
the air here, all awesome and stuff.
| | 00:47 | And when I go to the pop-up menu,
it's at the first frame of the timeline.
| | 00:52 | That's because we have to actually
manually type in the background frame but
| | 00:57 | we want to preview the pop-up menu over.
| | 00:59 | So we can just play our video and see
what it looks like with the pop-up menu.
| | 01:02 | I have to manually type in a given frame.
| | 01:05 | So, I would have to go in here and
manually type in 13:09 if I want to see that
| | 01:12 | frame we are just looking
at with the pop-up menu.
| | 01:15 | So, it's a little quirky yet. It seems
like there should be a way, in one of these
| | 01:19 | versions of Encore, to able to just play
your video while you're looking at your
| | 01:23 | pop-up menu and preview it as if you
were a user using the pop-up menu over
| | 01:27 | your footage, but you can't quite do that yet.
| | 01:29 | But at least for the time being, there
is a way to preview your pop-up menu over
| | 01:34 | the footage by using the pop-
up tab in the Menu Properties.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
18. Testing and ExportingEncore's automatic letterbox| 00:00 | Now as we prepare to export our project,
there is a very important concept I want
| | 00:04 | you to be aware of, and
that is Frame aspect ratio.
| | 00:08 | Previous in this training series, we
talked about the Pixel aspect ratio,
| | 00:11 | the aspect ratio of those little
tiny squares that make up the image.
| | 00:14 | But there are two important
aspect ratios for the entire frame.
| | 00:19 | The first is kind of like the
old school TV way of doing things.
| | 00:23 | It's very square, and it's referred to as 4:3.
| | 00:25 | It's a little bit more wide than it is
tall, but essentially, it looks square.
| | 00:31 | We refer to that as fullscreen.
| | 00:33 | Now there is also 16:9, so it's almost
twice as wide as it is tall, and we refer
| | 00:41 | to that as widescreen.
| | 00:43 | Now because of the increasing
popularity of HD, and because this is the way that
| | 00:47 | cinema is, widescreen is
quickly gaining popularity.
| | 00:52 | But what happens when you play
a widescreen DVD on a 4:3 TV?
| | 00:59 | Well, you actually have two options
for that. One, you could do something
| | 01:03 | called pan and scan.
| | 01:05 | On pan and scan, the DVD player will
crop the image to fit, so it'll actually
| | 01:10 | crop off the stuff that's too wide.
| | 01:13 | The other option that your DVD player
has is that it can letterbox the footage,
| | 01:18 | and that means that it plays the entire
4:3 image, but it shrinks it down so it
| | 01:24 | all fits in the 4:3 area, and that
creates black bars at the top and at the
| | 01:29 | bottom, and it maintains the
16:9 widescreen aspect ratio.
| | 01:34 | Many filmmakers prefer the letterbox
way of doing things because the pan and
| | 01:39 | scan way crops your image.
It kind of ruins the footage.
| | 01:42 | So, I think it's like 45% of
the actual shot gets cropped off.
| | 01:47 | Now with all the work the directors
put into accomplishing their shots and
| | 01:50 | setting these things up and composing
them correctly, that really messes with
| | 01:54 | the art of the piece.
| | 01:56 | So, Encore then does those directors
and arty people a favor by overriding
| | 02:02 | the set top DVD player setting and
forces set top DVDs to letterbox the 16:9
| | 02:09 | footage.
| | 02:11 | So, if you're outputting a widescreen
project from Encore, you never have to
| | 02:17 | worry about it being panned and scanned
and cropped at the edges because Encore
| | 02:22 | will force the set top DVD
player to play back with letterbox.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Checking your project for errors| 00:00 | So we're just about ready to export our project
to DVD, to Blu-ray disc, or to a Flash Web site.
| | 00:08 | But before we do that in the next movie,
we need to check our project to make
| | 00:12 | sure there aren't any problems, and
Encore has this built-in error checking
| | 00:17 | system that's absolutely amazing.
| | 00:19 | So I have my a super sexy project,
here I've got my buttons and my menu, and
| | 00:24 | I've got some assets here.
| | 00:26 | I've got timelines and a slideshow, or whatever.
| | 00:30 | I am feeling pretty good
about myself right about now.
| | 00:32 | So, I am going to go over to the
Build panel and resize this so I could
| | 00:35 | see everything here.
| | 00:37 | And before I go and build anything, I
am going to go ahead and click Check
| | 00:40 | Project button, which will bring up
the Check Project dialog box here, and I
| | 00:45 | could choose to check for certain things.
| | 00:47 | By default, I will just leave this
set because, by default, they are all
| | 00:51 | checked, and I usually never touched
that, because if there are any problems
| | 00:54 | here I want to know about it.
| | 00:55 | It's also a good idea, in this Check
Project dialog box, to look through these
| | 00:59 | objects, so that way as you become a DVD Author,
| | 01:02 | you know the type of things that
will cause errors in your project.
| | 01:05 | You will notice, for example, that it's
going to check to make sure that all of
| | 01:07 | our buttons are linked to something.
| | 01:10 | It's going to check to make sure
that we have all of our End Actions set
| | 01:13 | properly, that we have a
First Play object and so on.
| | 01:16 | So, let's go ahead click Start here,
and that took not very long at all.
| | 01:21 | And so we see that there is a button.
| | 01:22 | There is the icon for button here.
| | 01:24 | There is a button called
Ocean. That's over here.
| | 01:28 | And the Link is Not Set.
| | 01:29 | And there's also another button called
Olive Oil here, and the Link is Not Set.
| | 01:33 | So that is a problem.
| | 01:35 | We also have a Slideshow, and it has
two errors. One, it's in Orphan Timeline.
| | 01:40 | An orphan means that
it's not linked to anything.
| | 01:43 | So you have an Encore object, like a
timeline or a menu or a slideshow, not just
| | 01:48 | a regular old asset,
| | 01:49 | but it has to be an Encore object,
and it's not connected to anything.
| | 01:52 | So your viewers will never see it.
| | 01:54 | It will not be burned to the DVD.
| | 01:56 | So, it has an Orphan Timeline and also
it has an End Action, which actually, as
| | 02:01 | an Orphan Timeline, is kind of least of
its worries, but still good to know that
| | 02:05 | once we did link it to something, it
still doesn't have End Action set.
| | 02:08 | So now, all we have to do is fix these
problems and click Start and do Check
| | 02:13 | Project again, and just give ourselves
the go ahead and make sure everything
| | 02:16 | is okay.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Outputting to disc| 00:00 | So now we've built our DVD project,
and we've checked for problems.
| | 00:04 | Everything is smooth and ready to go,
so let's go ahead and build this disc.
| | 00:07 | Go to the Build tab here, the Build
panel, and we need to choose our format.
| | 00:12 | We could choose DVD, Blu-ray or Flash.
| | 00:16 | Since the process of burning DVD discs
and Blu-ray discs are pretty much the
| | 00:20 | same, we are going to talk
about those in this movie.
| | 00:22 | We'll talk about Flash Web sites
specifically, on in their own, in the next movie.
| | 00:26 | So, I am going to leave this set DVD for now.
| | 00:28 | For our Output, this is kind of
interesting. We can choose to output to a Disc,
| | 00:32 | Folder, Image, Master or a DDP Image.
| | 00:35 | Now if you choose a Disc, Encore is
actually going to burn the disc directly.
| | 00:42 | If you choose one of these other options,
then Encore is going to store stuff on
| | 00:47 | your computer so that it can be burned later.
| | 00:50 | Let's say I know I want to burn
certain discs like a few every week or
| | 00:54 | something like that.
| | 00:55 | I can actually create a folder, or an
image, or a master and leave those on my
| | 00:59 | hard drive and then call them back later.
| | 01:02 | And actually I misspoke, Master and
DDP image are used for replication.
| | 01:06 | We will talk about what that is a
little bit later on in this training series.
| | 01:10 | So I am going to come down here, and
we also have this Auto-Erase Rewritable
| | 01:14 | Discs and the Write Speed
and the Number of Copies.
| | 01:17 | I should probably point that out.
| | 01:19 | We also have the Disc Info
we've been talking about.
| | 01:21 | We could name our project here, so as
somebody puts the disc in their computer,
| | 01:26 | this name will pop up.
| | 01:28 | We can also choose the Size of our DVD.
| | 01:31 | I am just going to leave set to the
consumer standard, 4.7 GB, choose the Sides here.
| | 01:38 | And we'll talk about Region Codes and
some of this other 'bidness' a little bit
| | 01:42 | later in this training series.
| | 01:44 | But for now, that's really all we need to know.
| | 01:47 | I did mention before that if you have
a DVD Folder or a DVD Image that will
| | 01:51 | basically create files on your
hard drive to be burned later.
| | 01:55 | If you need to, you can go to the
Source area and by default, it says Create
| | 02:00 | Using Current Project, so it's going
to make a DVD by using this project we
| | 02:03 | have opened right now.
| | 02:04 | But we could also choose a DVD Volume
or Disc Image that we can load from our
| | 02:11 | hard drives some where else, maybe
one that we have previously created from
| | 02:14 | Encore, and then burn DVDs using that.
| | 02:17 | And after getting all the settings the
way you want them, all you have to do is
| | 02:20 | click the Build button. Whether you're
burning to a DVD or whether you're burning
| | 02:25 | to Blu-ray, really not too much
difference in terms of the settings here.
| | 02:31 | The same basic thing.
| | 02:33 | So, we click on DVD and if we were to
click on Build right now, we would burn
| | 02:37 | a DVD straightaway.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating Flash web sites| 00:00 | Now as we've been talking about, Encore
gives you the power to create Flash-based
| | 00:06 | Web sites. These are
actually really powerful Web sites.
| | 00:08 | One of the things we haven't talked
about yet is I'm going to go to the menu Final
| | 00:12 | here I am going to click
on the Locations button,
| | 00:15 | and if we go over the Properties panel,
and we're looking at a Button here,
| | 00:19 | if we go to the bottom we can
check Enable WebLink for Flash.
| | 00:23 | So if we are going to take this project
out to Flash, we can actually make it so
| | 00:27 | this button becomes a Web link and
links to an external site, like lynda.com.
| | 00:32 | That's pretty awesome.
| | 00:33 | This project, Our Story, links to this
timeline here and Products links to
| | 00:40 | this slideshow here.
| | 00:43 | So we are all ready and good to go.
| | 00:45 | So I am going to go over to the
Build panel, and I am going to change the
| | 00:48 | Format from DVD to Flash.
| | 00:50 | We get a few different options for this,
and we need to choose a Destination.
| | 00:54 | Where on our hard drive
is this going to save to?
| | 00:57 | We also need to the choose the type of
video, whether it's could be F4V or FLV.
| | 01:02 | FLV has long been a standard and is
compatible with most people's Internet browsers.
| | 01:08 | F4V is a more optimal format.
| | 01:10 | You're going to get better video at
lower file sizes, but it's not as compatible.
| | 01:14 | It came out little bit
more recently than FLV did.
| | 01:17 | We could also choose a Preset for the video.
| | 01:20 | We could even go to high def and Widescreen.
| | 01:23 | We have Standard and basically
fullscreen, and we have different quality levels
| | 01:27 | for each of these different pixel dimensions.
| | 01:30 | Now what's going to happen is Encore
is going to take your Flash Web site
| | 01:35 | and make it a SWF file, and it's going to
embed that SWF file inside of an HTML document.
| | 01:41 | And so you can choose one of these
templates one of these HTML templates that
| | 01:45 | comes with Encore, or you can import
a template that you make on your own.
| | 01:50 | Now the reason I am not able to
build it is because I have not chosen a
| | 01:54 | Destination to save it.
| | 01:56 | But I've already gone ahead and created
this for you because it does take a while.
| | 02:00 | It has to be transcoded and all of that.
| | 02:02 | So I am going to go to the Web site, and
here is our Encore project in our Web browser.
| | 02:08 | It is exactly what those
on the Web would see.
| | 02:10 | We have the subpicture
highlights with the rollovers.
| | 02:13 | I can click, and there is my footage.
| | 02:16 | We have Volume Controls over here on
the right-hand side. That particular
| | 02:19 | video clip does not have any audio, excuse me.
| | 02:21 | Actually, I'm going to go back there.
| | 02:22 | I have not done explaining it yet.
| | 02:23 | I have a Pause button here.
| | 02:25 | I could jump to the next chapter, to
the previous chapter and any time, I can
| | 02:29 | click this button to go up a level,
which is actually the main menu.
| | 02:33 | Let's see what a
slideshow looks like on the Web.
| | 02:35 | I am going to click on Products.
| | 02:36 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:48 | Pretty cool!
| | 02:48 | So you get the idea, and we could
just stop playing there and go up a menu,
| | 02:52 | and there you have it.
| | 02:54 | Now I'm going to click on this
Locations button, and nothing is going to happen.
| | 02:57 | This would take us to lynda.com.
| | 02:59 | This is our Web link button.
| | 03:01 | However, when you're previewing this
locally, sometimes the security features of
| | 03:06 | your Web browser, and this is the case
with me here, will not permit this to
| | 03:11 | happen, but when you actually use this
on a Web site, there are not any problems.
| | 03:15 | You could also see this really cool
little template that Encore made for me
| | 03:20 | automagically, without me having to do anything.
| | 03:23 | But this is the power of Encore.
| | 03:26 | I mean this is really a
fully functioning Web site.
| | 03:28 | We can go to other Web sites.
| | 03:30 | We can look at video, slides and all
kinds of stuff that we would normally
| | 03:34 | have in Encore on a DVD,
| | 03:36 | we could now put on the Web
because of this great feature.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
19. Important Technical IssuesDuplication vs. replication| 00:01 | Now when you are authoring DVDs, it's
important to know the difference between
| | 00:03 | duplication versus replication.
| | 00:06 | Both are ways of creating DVDs,
but here's the long and short of it.
| | 00:11 | Duplication is basically when you
duplicate a disc and you do it at home, like
| | 00:16 | if you are burning it from your
computer, that's referred to as duplication, or
| | 00:19 | making a duplicate.
| | 00:21 | The benefit of this, of course, is
that it's very low cost, and it's very
| | 00:24 | convenient. It's right there at your house,
typically, and you could just make a bunch
| | 00:28 | of a short copies, or a short order run.
| | 00:31 | If you want, you could make one
copy or 10, really, no big deal.
| | 00:34 | Now Replication is typically what we mean
when referring to professional disc duplication.
| | 00:41 | This is typically done at a very
professional facility, often called a
| | 00:44 | replication house or a replication
facility, and this is much more expensive
| | 00:49 | than just duplicating the discs on your own.
| | 00:52 | However, the benefit of using a
replication facility is that you'll have access to
| | 00:56 | greater features, such as copy
protection, which we'll look at in the next
| | 00:59 | movie, and also reliable region encoding.
| | 01:02 | Now one of things I should probably
point out about exporting for a replication
| | 01:06 | facility, that's why we create a DVD
Masters and the DDP Image that we talked
| | 01:12 | about when we were talking about building discs.
| | 01:15 | The DDP Image is something that many
replication facilities require, and the DVD
| | 01:20 | Master is something you have to
actually record straight to DLT, or Digital
| | 01:24 | Linear Tape, from your computer, so
that's typically done for Replication.
| | 01:30 | Another thing that's beneficial here is
that if you're going to export on your
| | 01:35 | own computer, you are going to
duplicate DVDs, sometimes there's compatibility
| | 01:38 | issues with like older DVD
players or just quirky DVD players.
| | 01:42 | Sometimes things will work in my Xbox
360 DVD player that won't work in a couple
| | 01:47 | of other of my set top boxes, and vice versa.
| | 01:49 | It's kind of unpredictable, but when
you have a professionally replicated disc,
| | 01:54 | you're almost guaranteed pretty much
universal playback on most set top players.
| | 01:58 | So again, Duplication, amateur, done
at home, cheap - Replication much more
| | 02:04 | expensive and also much more powerful.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| About copy protection| 00:00 | If we go over to the Build panel and
scroll down with the Format set to DVD,
| | 00:05 | scroll down, we see that
we have Copy Protection.
| | 00:08 | Now there are different types of Copy
Protection, which we'll find in this CGMS,
| | 00:12 | and we could say that there are No
copies allowed, One copy is allowed or
| | 00:18 | Unlimited copies are allowed.
| | 00:20 | So by default, it set to Unlimited
copies are allowed, and that's no big deal.
| | 00:23 | But if we say No copies are allowed,
then we were basically turning on a
| | 00:27 | Copy Protection system.
| | 00:29 | We have CSS, and we also have Macrovision.
| | 00:33 | Now this is not something
that you can do at home.
| | 00:37 | If you're going to add Copy Protection,
this needs to be for replication only.
| | 00:42 | You can't, again, do this at home.
| | 00:43 | It needs to be done by a professional facility.
| | 00:46 | And oftentimes, this adds money,
such as, for example, Macrovision.
| | 00:49 | This prevents your disc from being
copied, and it's fairly secure, but
| | 00:53 | Macrovision charges royalties on every disc
that's made with Macrovision Copy Protection.
| | 00:58 | So be aware of what you're getting into.
Talk with your replication facility
| | 01:01 | about what you are looking
for in terms of disc protection.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| About region encoding| 00:00 | If you're having your disc
professionally replicated, another feature that will
| | 00:04 | be available to you is Region Encoding.
| | 00:06 | So if we go over to the Build panel
here and you scroll down a bit, we have
| | 00:10 | this Region Codes area.
| | 00:12 | Now by default, All Regions are Enabled.
| | 00:15 | But what happens with professional
DVDs is that they like to make it so that
| | 00:20 | only that certain area could play those DVDs.
| | 00:24 | So, for example, here in United
States, we have Region 1 DVDs.
| | 00:29 | If we were going to take a DVD from
some other country, maybe somewhere in
| | 00:33 | Europe like Great Britain or something,
we would probably not be able to play it
| | 00:38 | in our DVD players because it was set
up that way, and you could only play DVDs
| | 00:43 | from your given region.
| | 00:44 | So if you wanted to go the professional
route, you could choose Custom and then
| | 00:48 | uncheck the places that you
do not want to play your DVD.
| | 00:52 | Now this is a pretty professional feature.
| | 00:56 | So you might want to leave it stuck on All
Regions unless you know exactly what you're going.
| | 01:00 | And remember, again, that for
predictable results with Region Encoding, you'll
| | 01:05 | want to go to a replication facility.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Fixing the audio_TS problem| 00:00 | The AUDIO_TS issue is also
one that you should be aware of.
| | 00:05 | You see, when you create a DVD folder
from Encore, or any other DVD program, it
| | 00:11 | typically creates two folders:
| | 00:13 | a VIDEO_TS folder and an AUDIO_TS folder.
| | 00:18 | Now early DVD players needed both
folders or else they would not play the DVD.
| | 00:24 | But after awhile, you only
needed the VIDEO_TS folder.
| | 00:28 | Well, Encore only creates the VIDEO_TS
folder and does not create an AUDIO_TS folder.
| | 00:36 | So when you create discs sometimes in
Encore, they will not play back on older DVD
| | 00:41 | player, because they do
not have the AUDIO_TS folder.
| | 00:45 | So the fix is to burn to, or build to,
a DVD folder, and then manually go in
| | 00:52 | here, create a new folder, call it
AUDIO_TS, and then burn the disc with this
| | 00:59 | additional folder.
| | 01:00 | Now, this additional folder
will be empty, and that's fine.
| | 01:03 | The DVD player just needs to see that it exists.
| | 01:07 | So if you are having set top
compatibility issues with Encore, this might
| | 01:11 | be your solution.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
20. Integrating with Other Adobe ApplicationsImporting sequences from Premiere Pro| 00:00 | If you own Encore, then you also own
Premiere, and there's a great relationship
| | 00:05 | between those two applications.
| | 00:06 | Here I have this Export to Encore
project opened up in Premiere where I have
| | 00:11 | this little snowboarding guy going crazy there.
| | 00:14 | What I'm going to do is go over to
Encore, and I don't even have to compress or
| | 00:19 | take the time to render or anything.
| | 00:21 | I could import this Premiere project and
still work on it in Premiere, and there
| | 00:26 | doesn't have to be any compression or
rendering, total timesaver and also a
| | 00:30 | quality saver as well.
| | 00:31 | I'm going to go to File > Adobe Dynamic Links.
| | 00:34 | We can't import this in the regular way
we import other files, and I'm going to
| | 00:38 | choose Import Premiere Pro Sequence.
| | 00:40 | Now in the left side of this dialog box,
I'm going to navigate to the Exercise
| | 00:46 | Files that come with this training, and
I'm going to go to the Media folder, and
| | 00:52 | in Miscellaneous Files folder,
choose the Export to Encore.prproj file.
| | 00:58 | When you select it, on the right-hand
side, you will see all of the sequences
| | 01:01 | that are within that Premiere project.
| | 01:03 | So we can't import the entire project.
| | 01:05 | We import the Sequences from a project.
| | 01:08 | So I'm going to click on the
Sequence here, click OK, and now we have the
| | 01:12 | sequence here in Encore that we can
just go ahead, and hit Command+T or Ctrl+T
| | 01:17 | on the PC to put that into a Timeline.
| | 01:20 | Now you see that it's magenta
here. That indicates that this is
| | 01:23 | dynamically linked to Premiere.
| | 01:26 | If we're going to go back to
Premiere and change the color, or trim it, or
| | 01:30 | whatever type of edit we would want to
do to it in Premiere, it would show up
| | 01:33 | here in Encore without having to render,
or again, compress it, and take all that
| | 01:38 | time, really a great
relationship between these two applications.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating motion menus in After Effects| 00:00 | Now, you've heard me mention a few
times throughout this Training Series about how
| | 00:03 | much using After Effects has helped me
as I've been working through Encore, and
| | 00:09 | there is a great connection there as
well between Encore and After Effects.
| | 00:11 | If I go to the File menu here, I can
go to Adobe Dynamic Link, and if I have
| | 00:16 | Adobe Production Premium installed,
then I can create New After Effects
| | 00:19 | Composition or import an
After Effects Composition as well.
| | 00:23 | Now if you don't have the Adobe
Dynamic Link installed, but you do have After
| | 00:27 | Effects, let me show you what you can do.
| | 00:28 | Let me go over here to After Effects.
| | 00:30 | I am going to double-click in this Project panel.
| | 00:32 | This works very similar to the way
it does in Encore to import here.
| | 00:36 | I'm going to navigate to the PSD Files
in the Media folder, and I'm going to
| | 00:40 | select the Explore California
layered menu and click Open.
| | 00:44 | Then in the Import Kind, I'm going to
choose Composition and actually I'm going
| | 00:49 | to change that to Composition
- Retain layer Sizes, actually.
| | 00:52 | I'll leave these other
settings as is and click OK.
| | 00:56 | This little thing right
here is called the Composition.
| | 00:59 | Go ahead and double-click that to
open it up, and here is our Encore menu
| | 01:04 | with all of our layers.
| | 01:05 | So we could animate this
to create a motion menu.
| | 01:08 | Now, I could click on Explore, for example.
| | 01:10 | I will hit P for Position.
| | 01:12 | I could move this text in.
| | 01:14 | I could have it animate on if I wanted to.
| | 01:16 | I could also press T for Opacity.
| | 01:19 | I could have it fade in, and in After
Effects CS5 Essential Training, one of
| | 01:24 | things I did with this bicyclist here
is that we used this really cool tool in
| | 01:27 | After Effects called the Puppet tool to
bend her and make it look like she's is
| | 01:31 | actually riding this bike,
which is really fun too.
| | 01:33 | So while you can, at a basic level, be
really good at Encore and make some really
| | 01:38 | great projects just with the
stuff that comes with Encore,
| | 01:40 | if you really want to get good at DVD
authoring, I highly recommend mastering
| | 01:45 | After Effects and Photoshop as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Making buttons and subpictures in After Effects| 00:00 | Now I should also point out, for
those of you that work in After Effects,
| | 00:03 | you could create buttons and
subpictures and actually even video buttons
| | 00:07 | here in After Effects.
| | 00:09 | So, for example, I have this Play Text here.
| | 00:12 | Turn that on and off so you
could see that, blinking at you.
| | 00:16 | Then right above that in the
layers stack, I have the star here.
| | 00:20 | What I want is the Play Text to be a
button, and I want this star to be a
| | 00:24 | subpicture highlight.
| | 00:25 | No problem whatsoever.
| | 00:26 | So I'm going to just go ahead and
select one of them, Shift+Click the other
| | 00:30 | one, and with both of these objects selected,
I'm going to go to the Layer menu at the top.
| | 00:34 | I'm going to choose
Adobe Encore > Create Button.
| | 00:38 | Now, we can create the button name here.
| | 00:40 | I'll just go ahead and call this Play,
and then for Subpicture 1, we can choose
| | 00:46 | which object of our selected objects
here do we want to be the Subpicture?
| | 00:50 | Well, I don't want the Play
Text to be the Subpicture.
| | 00:52 | I want that to be on constantly.
| | 00:54 | So I'm just going to chose Star, so that
star becomes Subpicture 1. Now watch this.
| | 00:59 | When I click OK, it adds the code for me,
the Plus sign in the parentheses, and
| | 01:05 | if I double-click this to open up and
see its layers, you can see that I have
| | 01:08 | the text and the star with the =1 Subpicture
code already added, thanks to After Effects.
| | 01:16 | So again, there really is this amazing
integration between Premiere, Encore,
| | 01:21 | and After Effects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionGoodbye| 00:00 | Well, ladies and gentlemen, I have had
a total blast teaching you Encore, and
| | 00:04 | I thank you so much for that opportunity to
guide you through this application that I love so much.
| | 00:08 | I have been doing this for a while on lynda.com.
| | 00:11 | I now have taught dozens of courses on
lynda.com and Encore actually was my very first.
| | 00:16 | So it's been a privilege to share this with you.
| | 00:18 | Thank you so much for watching.
| | 00:20 | On behalf of lynda.com, I'm Chad Perkins.
| | 00:22 | Take care.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
